JP2020116073A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To perform start storage display that enhances a player's interest.SOLUTION: A game machine which executes a game (a special symbol variable display game) on the basis that a start condition is satisfied, and generates a special game state that imparts game value to a player when a result of the game becomes a special result includes: start storage means (a game control device) which extracts a prescribed random number on the basis that the start condition is satisfied and stores it as start storage of the game; start storage display control means (a performance control device) performing start storage display (reservation on standby) corresponding to the start storage; and prior determination means (the performance control device) for making prior determination of the prescribed random number before a game corresponding to the prescribed random number is executed. A center of gravity interval between adjacent start storage displays is set to a prescribed interval (distance d1). The start storage display control means can perform the start storage display in a display area selected on the basis of a result of the prior determination.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 67

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game based on establishment of a start condition and generates a special game state in which a game value is given to a player when the result of the game is a special result.

Conventionally, a variable display device capable of displaying a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed based on the winning of a game ball in a starting winning area, and a player when the result of the variable display game is a special result It is a gaming machine that generates an advantageous special game state, and based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area, a predetermined random number is extracted and the predetermined number is set as the upper limit of the starting memory that is the right to execute the variable display game. And a starting memory display control means for displaying a starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory, and an in-progress information display control means for displaying an in-progress information display which is information about the variable display game being executed. 2. Description of the Related Art There is known a game machine provided with, (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2005-147099, A

In the conventional game machine, there is a case where it is not possible to display a start memory display that enhances the interest of the player.
It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of displaying a start memory display that enhances the interest of the player.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a start condition and generates a special game state in which a game value is given to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
A start storage means for extracting a predetermined random number based on the establishment of the start condition and storing it as start memory for the game;
Start memory display control means for displaying a start memory display corresponding to the start memory,
And a pre-judgment means for pre-judging the predetermined random number before the game corresponding to the predetermined random number is executed,
The center of gravity interval between the starting memory displays adjacent to each other is set to a predetermined interval,
The starting memory display control means is capable of displaying the starting memory display in a display area selected based on the result of the preliminary determination.

According to the present invention, it is possible to display a start memory display that enhances the interest of the player.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining a winning device. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number updating process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flow chart explaining winning a prize switch / state monitoring processing. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure game process. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flow chart explaining a special process starting port switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure normal process. (A) is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing, and (b) is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure fluctuation process. It is a flow chart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flow chart for explaining a general-purpose game process. It is a flow chart explaining ordinary processing usually. It is a flow chart explaining processing during general figure change. It is a flow chart explaining processing during public figure display. It is a flow chart explaining the processing during ordinary drawing. It is a flow chart explaining external information edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining external information edit processing. It is the flowchart which explains the main processing in the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart explaining reception command check processing. It is a flow chart explaining received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart explaining a look-ahead symbol system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining look-ahead variable system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining variable system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining variation production setting processing. It is a figure explaining an example of a precursor effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a precursor effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a precursor effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a precursor effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a precursor effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a precursor effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a precursor effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a precursor effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a precursor effect. It is a figure explaining an example of the modification of a sign production. It is a figure explaining an example of the modification of a sign production. It is a figure explaining an example of the modification of a sign production. It is a figure explaining an example of the modification of a sign production. It is a figure explaining an example of holding change production. It is a figure explaining an example of holding change production. It is a figure explaining an example of holding change production. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestive production, change production, and reservation production. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure starting memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure starting memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure starting memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure starting memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure starting memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure starting memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure starting memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure starting memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure starting memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure starting memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure starting memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure starting memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure starting memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a decoration special figure starting memory display. It is a figure explaining an example of a reservation expansion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of reservation expansion production. It is a figure explaining an example of a reservation expansion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a reservation expansion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a reservation expansion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a reservation expansion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a reservation expansion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of reservation expansion production. It is a figure explaining an example of a reservation expansion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a reservation expansion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a reservation expansion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a reservation expansion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a reservation expansion effect.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is attached to an outer frame (support frame) 11 via a hinge 13 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Also, the front frame (main frame)
A glass frame 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front of the game board 30.
(Transparent plate holding frame) is attached.

Further, an illuminating device (moving light) 16 having a lamp and a motor built therein and a payout abnormality notification lamp (LED) 17 are provided above the glass frame 15. Further, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, there are provided a frame decorating device 18 that internally includes a lamp or the like and emits light for decoration and effect, and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect). There is. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (which supplies game balls to a hitting ball launching device (not shown)
Reservoir plate), the upper bowl ball outlet 22 from which the gaming balls dispensed from the dispensing unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 flow out, and the gaming balls dispensed in a state where the upper dish 21 is full. A lower tray (reception tray) 23 for storing and an operation unit 24 of the ball-striking launcher are provided. Furthermore, the plate 21
At the upper edge portion, a production operation unit 550 that serves as an operation unit that receives an operation input from the player is provided. The effect operation unit 550 is an effect button 25 having an effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player, and the upper surface (press surface) of the effect button 25 is in contact with the player. A touch panel 29 for receiving an operation input is provided. A key 26 for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be provided separately from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device may be provided near the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, on the front surface of the glass frame 15 above the upper plate 21, in order to eject the prepaid card from the ball lending button 27, which is operated when the player receives a ball lending from the adjacent ball lending machine, and the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28 to be operated on, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation unit 24 to cause the ball launching device to direct the game balls supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. In addition, the player operates the production operation unit 55.
By operating 0, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2 ), it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is a resin side case 3 provided at each of four corners of the game board 30.
3 and the guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a center case (game production structure) 40 provided with a display device 41 is disposed in the substantially center. Display device 41
Is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and prevent the game balls from jumping in from the peripheral game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area where the image on the display screen can be displayed (display area), a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols) and information relating to the game such as a character that directs the special figure variable display game and a background image that enhances the effect are displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is played. Further, on the display screen, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed.

Further, in the upper right part of the center case 40, a board effect device 44 for effecting a game by operating is provided. The board production device 44 includes two arms to which the sub-display device 42 is attached at the front end, and the sub-display device 42 is moved relative to the display device 41 by rotating the arms around the base end. Thus, it is possible to convert the state of overlapping in the front-rear direction and the state of not overlapping.

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol starting gate (universal figure starting gate) 34 that gives a starting condition of the universal figure changing display game is provided. The game ball that has won the universal figure starting gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 4).
On the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, three general winning openings 3
5 is arranged, one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the universal figure starting gate 34. The game balls that have won the general winning openings 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 4).

Further, on the left side of the universal figure starting gate 34, an ordinary variable winning device 37 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) for providing a starting condition of the second special figure changing display game (special figure 2 changing display game) is provided. ing.
The normal variation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction tilting to the right and converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in, and a partition wall 37d that restricts the flow of the game ball. ing. The movable member 37b normally stands up to maintain a state in which the distance from the partition wall 37d is equal to or smaller than the diameter of the game ball, that is, a closed state in which the game ball cannot flow (a disadvantageous state for the player). Then, when the result of the universal figure variation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the universal electric prize solenoid 37c (see FIG. 4) as a drive device is used to open the game ball easily into the regular variation winning device 37. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the normal variation winning device 37 is the start port 2 switch 37.
a (see FIG. 4).

Further, below the normal variation winning device 37, a special variation winning device (large winning hole) 3 capable of converting the state in which the game ball is not accepted and the state in which it is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game 3
8 are provided.
The special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening/closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in the direction of falling toward the front side, depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. From the state where the special winning opening is closed (the blocking state which is disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (
It is converted to a state advantageous to the player). That is, the special variation winning device 38, for example,
Open/close door 38c driven by a special winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 4) as a driving device
With a special winning opening that can be opened and closed by a special winning state, the special winning opening can be converted from a closed state to an open state to facilitate the inflow of game balls into the special winning opening, and the player can set a predetermined prize. The game value (prize ball) of is added. A special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 4) is provided inside the special winning opening (winning area) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. .. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two special winning opening switches 38a are provided, and the game ball that has flowed into the special winning opening is detected by any of the special winning opening switches 38a. By thus providing a plurality of special winning opening switches 38a, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball that has flown into the special winning opening.

Further, below the center case 40, a first start winning opening 36 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) and a second special drawing that give start conditions for the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). The winning device 90 is provided with a second starting winning opening 97 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a starting condition of a floating display game (special figure 2 floating display game).
The winning device 90 includes a distribution member 92 that alternately distributes the game balls, which have flown into the upper inlet 90a, to the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97 (see FIG. 3). First
The game ball winning the start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 4), and the game ball winning the second starting winning opening 97 is detected by the start opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 4). To be done.
Further, below the winning device 90, there is provided an outlet 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize.

3A to 3C are front views of the winning device 90 of the present embodiment, showing the state in which the front cover member is removed.
As shown in FIG. 3A, the winning device 90 includes a distribution member 92 at a position directly below the inflow port 90a in the inside thereof. In addition, on the lower left side of the distribution member 92, the first start winning opening 3
6 are arranged, and a second start winning opening 97 is arranged on the lower right side of the distribution member 92.
Further, a front cover member is provided so as to cover the front of the distribution member 92, the first start winning opening 36, and the second starting winning opening 97. This front cover member is transparent or semi-transparent so that the behavior of the game balls in the winning device 90 can be visually recognized.

The distribution member 92 is rotatable around a shaft pin 92a along the front-rear direction, and has an upper arm portion 92b extending upward from a position where the shaft pin 92a is arranged and a left arm portion 92c extending leftward. And a right arm portion 92d extending rightward. To the left of the upper arm portion 92b of the three arm portions, a left holding portion 92 that temporarily holds a game ball by the upper arm portion 92b and the left arm portion 92c.
e is formed, and on the right side of the upper arm portion 92b, a right holding portion 92f for temporarily holding a game ball is formed by the upper arm portion 92b and the right arm portion 92d.
The distribution member 92, with the upper arm portion 92b always facing upward, as shown in FIG. 3(b), the left holding portion 92e can receive the game ball flowing into the inflow port 90a, and the position shown in FIG. As shown in c), the right holding portion 92f is rotatable between a position where the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 90a can be received.

As shown in FIG. 3B, when the left holding part 92e is in a position where the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 90a can be received, the right holding part 92f moves the game ball toward the second starting winning opening 97. It will be in a state of flowing down.
Further, as shown in FIG. 3C, when the right holding portion 92f is in a position where the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 90a can be received, the left holding portion 92e faces the first starting winning opening 36 and plays the game. The ball is in a state of flowing down.

As shown in FIG. 3A, a distribution member side magnet 96a is attached to the rear of the upper arm 92b of the distribution member 92. In addition, the base member side magnet 96b is attached to a position facing the distribution member side magnet 96a when the upper arm portion 92b is vertical in the base member 93 to which the distribution member 92 is attached from the front. There is. The distribution member side magnet 96a and the base member side magnet 96b are attached so that the poles on the opposite sides are the same.
By the repulsive force of 6a and 96b, the distribution member 92 is urged to rotate to either the left or right without staying in a state where the upper arm 92b is vertical. As a result, in a state in which the distribution member 92 has stopped rotating, either the left holding portion 92e or the right holding portion 92f is ready to receive the game ball that has flowed into the inlet 90a.

As shown in FIGS. 3B and 3C, the game ball that has flown into the inflow port 90a is the left holding portion 92e.
And the right holding portion 92f is held by one holding portion facing the inflow port 90a and in a receivable state. When the game ball is held by one of the holding parts, the distribution member 92 is rotated in the direction of the one holding part by the weight of the game ball, and the distribution member 92 is rotated for the held game ball. It flows down toward the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 97 in the direction.

That is, as shown in FIG. 3B, when the game ball that has flowed in the left holding portion 92e is received, the distribution member 92 is rotated left by the weight of the game ball, and the game ball is moved to the first start winning opening 36. After guiding
As shown in FIG. 3C, the right holding portion 92f stops in a state in which the next game ball can be received. Then, as shown in FIG. 3C, when receiving the game ball that has flowed in the right holding portion 92f, the distribution member 92 is rotated to the right by the weight of the game ball to the game ball to the second start winning opening 97. After the guidance,
), the left holding part 92e stops in the state which can receive the next game ball.

The game balls flowing down from the holding portions 92e and 92f have a high possibility of flowing into the first starting winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 97, but may not flow in. If not, the winning device 9
It flows out of 0. In particular, if the momentum when flowing into the holding portions 92e and 92f is strong, there is a high possibility that it will not flow into the first starting winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 97. In addition, you may comprise so that a prize may be won in any of the starting winning openings.

Further, as the distribution member 92 rotates, the other holding portion, which is not the holding portion that has held the game ball, faces the inflow port 90a and can be received. Then, the game ball received next time is guided to the winning opening on the other holding portion side. As a result, the inlet 9
The game balls flowing into 0a will be alternately distributed to the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game area 32 in which the game balls flow down, the area on the left side of the center case 40 is the left side game area, and the area on the right side of the center case 40 is the right side game area. ing. Then, the player can aim the winning in the winning device 90 by adjusting the launching force to shoot the game ball to the left game area (so-called left hit), and shoot the game ball to the right game area (so-called right). By hitting), the universal figure starting gate 34 and the ordinary variation winning device 37
It is possible to aim to win the special variable winning device 38.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure changing display game, the second special figure changing display game, and the general figure starting gate 34, which are special figure changing display games, are displayed. A collective display device 50 for displaying a general-purpose variable display game triggered by winning and various information is provided.

The collective display device 50 includes a special figure 1 display device (first special figure fluctuation display portion) 51a (D1) and a first special figure fluctuation display game, which are configured by a 7-segment type display device (LED lamp) or the like. 2 Special figure variable display game special figure 2 display device (second special figure variable display section) 51b (D2) and LED display lamp variation display section for general figure variation display game (general figure display unit) 52 (D10, D18
), and storage display sections 53, 54, 55 (D11 to D16) for notifying the number of starting memories of each variable display game, which are also configured by LED lamps.

In addition, the collective display device 50, the first gaming state display unit (first gaming state display unit, right-handed informing unit) 56 (D8) for informing that the right-handed state is more advantageous than the left-handed state. ), a second gaming state display section (second gaming state indicator, time saving state reporting section) 57 (D9) that lights up when the time saving state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time saving state, the probability of a big hit when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on The third gaming state display section (third gaming state display unit, probability state display section) 58 (D17) that indicates that the state is in a high probability state, the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (opening/closing of the special variation winning device 38) Number of times)
A round display portion 59 (D3 to D7) for displaying is provided. In addition, the collective display device 5
The 0 may further be provided with a display unit (display device) or the like that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies the occurrence of the big hit.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51a and the special figure 2 display device 51b is, for example, in the center while the variation display game is being executed, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed on the display device 41. The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. In addition, in the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51a, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also driven to blink to vary. It is configured such that the fact that it is in the middle is displayed and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished. When the result of the game is “out”, for example, the central segment (8th segment on the lower right side in addition to the special figure 1) is turned on as a result mode of the out, and the result of the game is In the case of “win”, the game result is displayed by turning on a result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the off result mode (special result mode).

The public figure display 52 blinks a lamp during the change to indicate that the change is occurring, and after a predetermined time, displays the game result as a lighting mode or a lighting color according to the result of the game.
In addition, the universal figure hold indicator 55 is a universal figure starting gate 3 which is a variation start condition of the universal figure indicator 52.
The starting memory number (=holding number) of 4 is displayed by turning off, blinking, and lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The special figure 1 hold indicator 53 indicates the number of the first starting memory (special figure 1 hold) which is the right to execute the first special figure variable display game displayed on the special figure 1 indicator 51a by turning off a plurality of LEDs, Display by blinking or lighting.
The special figure 2 hold indicator 54 indicates the number of the second starting memory (special figure 2 hold) which is the right to execute the second special figure variable display game displayed on the special figure 2 indicator 51b by turning off a plurality of LEDs. , Blinking,
Display by lighting.

The first gaming state display unit (right-handling notification unit) 56 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, in the gaming state (normal hitting state) where left-handing is more advantageous than right-handing, the lamp is turned off. In the gaming state where right-handedness is more advantageous than left-handedness (right-handedness), the lamp is turned on.
The second gaming state display unit (time saving state notification unit) 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, for example,
In the normal gaming state where the time saving state does not occur (when the time saving is not in operation), the lamp is turned off, and when the time saving state occurs (when the time saving is in operation), the lamp is turned on.

The third gaming state display section (probability state display section) 58 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, for example,
When the probability state of big hit is low probability state (normal probability state) when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the lamp is turned off, and when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the probability state of big hit is high probability state (probability change state). If so, turn on the lamp.
The round display unit 59 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the special game state based on the big hit is not turned on, the lamp is turned off, and during the special game state, it corresponds to the number of rounds selected according to the special result. Turn on the lamp.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game ball (from a launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32 (
A game is performed by hitting a pachinko ball). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the universal figure starting gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , The first start winning hole 36
, The second start winning port 97, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38,
It flows into the outlet 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal variation winning device 37 or the special variation winning device 38, a number corresponding to the type of the winning opening won. The prize balls are discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 4) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

On the other hand, in the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 4) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit in the area 32 passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and the universal figure variable display game is played. In addition, the general figure fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, the general figure fluctuation display game has already been played and the general figure fluctuation display game has not ended, or the general figure fluctuation display game is hit When the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34 when 37 is converted to the open state, if the number of universal figure starting memory is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), the universal figure starting memory number is added ( +1), and one universal figure starting memory is stored. The number of memories of this figure start prize is displayed on the figure hold indicator 55 of the collective display device 50. In addition, a random number value for hit determination (random number value for hit) for determining the result of the universal figure variation display game is stored in the universal figure starting memory, and this random number value for hit determination is used as a determination value. To determine the result of the general-purpose variable display game. When the random number for hit determination coincides with the determination value, the general figure variable display game becomes a win and a specific result mode (normal figure specification result) is derived.

The universal figure variation display game is provided on the collective display device 50, and is displayed on a variation display section (general figure indicator) 52 configured by LEDs. The lighting mode and the lighting color of the LEDs are normal. Makes identification information (general drawing, ordinary design). In addition, the universal display 52 is configured with a display device,
For example, a number, a symbol, a character pattern, etc. may be used as the normal identification information, which may be variably displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed to display the result. If the stop display of the general figure fluctuation display game is the general figure identification result, the general figure is won and the ordinary variable winning device 37 is hit.
The movable member 37b becomes open for a predetermined time. As a result, the normal variation winning device 3
It becomes easy for the game ball to win the second start winning opening inside 7, and the number of times the second special figure variation display game is executed increases.

The winning ball to the first starting winning opening 36, the winning ball to the second starting winning opening 97, and the winning ball to the normal variable winning device 37 are respectively the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 3 provided inside. It is detected by the switch 97a and the start port 2 switch 37a. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected as a start winning ball of the first special figure variable display game, and is stored as a first starting memory with a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) as a limit. The game balls that have won the second start winning opening 97 and the ordinary variable winning device 37 are detected as the starting winning balls of the second special figure variable display game, and a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) is stored as the second starting memory. Memorized in. Also,
Big hit random number value and big hit random number value and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted as start memory information at the time of detection of this start winning a prize sphere, respectively, the extracted random number value is the game control device 100 (
In a special figure storage area (a part of RAM) in (see FIG. 4), each is stored as a special figure starting memory up to a predetermined number of times (for example, four times at maximum). Then, the number of stored special figure starting memory is displayed on the memory display section (special figure 1 reserved display 53, special figure 2 reserved display 54) for informing the number of starting winnings of the collective display device 50, and at the same time, the center is displayed. It is also displayed on the display device 41 of the case 40 as a decoration special figure starting memory display.

The game control device 100, based on the first start winning a prize hole 36, the second starting winning a prize hole 97, or the prize to the normal variable winning a prize device 37, or their start memory, the special figure 1 display 51a (variable display device). Alternatively, the special figure 2 display device 51b (variable display device) plays the first or second special figure variable display game. The first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, a plurality of special symbols (special figure,
(Identification information) is variably displayed, and then a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. Also,
A decorative special figure variable display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed on the display device (image display device) 41 is executed. Then, as a result of the special figure variation display game, the special figure 1 display device 51a or the special figure 2 display device 51
When the display mode of b is the special result mode (special result), it is a big hit and the special game state (so-called big hit state) is set. Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 is also the special result mode.

In the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41, for example, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above on the display device 41 is changed to the left variable display area (first special symbol),
In the right fluctuation display area (second special symbol) and the middle fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, after a predetermined time, the symbols that are changing are stopped in order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode configured by the displayed identification information. Further, on the display device 41, a variable display game with decorative special symbols corresponding to the number of special figure starting memories is played, and various effect displays such as appearance of characters are performed to improve interest.

The special figure 1 display 51a and the special figure 2 display 51b may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display is made so as not to be executed independently or at the same time. The game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use different display devices or different display areas for the first special figure variable display game and the second special figure variable display game, or use the same display device or display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. Further, the special-figure 1 display 51a and the special-figure 2 display 51b may not be provided in the gaming machine 10, and the special-figure variable display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

In addition, in the state where the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) can be started and the number of stored memories is 0, the first start winning opening 36 (or the second starting winning opening) When the game ball is won in 97 or the normal variation winning device 37), the starting memory is stored in association with the occurrence of the starting right, the starting memory number is incremented by 1, and the first special feature is immediately based on the starting memory. The figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) is started, and at this time, the starting memory number is decremented by one.
On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) cannot be started immediately,
For example, when the first or second special map variation display game has already been played and the special figure variation display game is not finished or in the special game state, the first start winning opening 36 (or, When a game ball is won in the second starting winning opening 97 or the normal variation winning device 37), if the starting memory number is less than the upper limit number, the starting memory number is incremented by 1 and one starting memory is stored. Then, in a state where the number of starting memories is 1 or more, a state in which the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure variation display game or the special game state) End), the start memory number is decremented by 1, and the first start memory is stored based on the stored start memory.
The special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) is started. In the following description, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variation display game.

Although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36 in the first starting winning opening 36
a, the starting opening 3 switch 97a in the second starting winning opening 97, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the big winning opening switch 3
A non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a proximity switch) that uses a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil and includes a coil for magnetic detection is used for 8a. ing. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 or the like is a micro switch having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

FIG. 4 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls a game in an integrated manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It comprises a CPU section 110 which has, an input section 120 which has an input port, an output section 130 which has an output port and a driver, a data bus 140 which connects the CPU section 110, the input section 120 and the output section 130, and the like. ..

The CPU section 110 is a game microcomputer (called amusement chip (IC))
CPU) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. DC32V, DC12V, D generated by the power supply device 400 are provided in the game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as C5V is supplied to enable the operation.

The power supply device 400 is an AC- that generates the DC voltage of DC 32V from an AC power supply of 24V.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a DC converter or a DC-DC converter for generating a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from a DC32V voltage, and a RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 are supplied with a power supply voltage at the time of power failure. Backup power supply unit 420 to supply
And, it has a power failure monitoring circuit, and is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 which generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal which inform the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply part 420 and the control signal generation part 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, the main. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, the cost can be reduced by removing it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power source is the game microcomputer 11 of the game control device 100.
1 (in particular, the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430, for example, monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Further, even when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, processing for forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
An M (random access memory) 111C is provided.

The ROM 111B stores invariant information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random number values at the time of game control. Used as. ROM111B or RAM11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as starting memory. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the special result mode, the game state is advantageous for the player (special game state)
In the gaming machine 10 that becomes, at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not derived and displayed yet,
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state in which the variable display is performed by the plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform (so-called full rotation reach). Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game varies a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variation display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the result mode is displayed by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the left and right variable display areas, the condition that satisfies the special result mode (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, at the time when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas of left, middle, and right (for example, the same Status that has become identification information,
However, the special result mode is excluded) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this reach state.

Then, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving the special result mode is different (expected value is different), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) is set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach. In addition, this reach state is included in at least the variable display mode when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit compared to the case where the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes the game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the symbol of the big hit, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (
Random pattern generation to generate random pattern random numbers for determining various reach and variable display game execution time in variable display without reach, etc. And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

Further, the CPU 111A executes the ROM 111B in the processing related to the special figure variation display game.
One of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111A causes the game result of the special figure variation display game (big hit or miss), the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state, and the current game. One of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected from a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables based on the operation status (time saving operation status (universal power support status)) of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as a status, the number of starting memories, and the like. To get. Here, CPU1
11A constitutes a variation distribution information acquisition unit that acquires any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of a payout unit to drive a payout ball according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control for paying out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on a ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

In the input section 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, a normal variation winning device 37.
Starting port 2 switch 37a, starting port 3 switch 97a in second starting winning opening 97, gate switch 34a in universal figure starting gate 34, winning opening switch 35a, special variation winning device 38
Connected to the special winning opening switch 38a, and the high level supplied from these switches is 1
An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 that receives a signal of negative logic such as a low level of 7V at 1V and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V is provided. Proximity I/F 12
In No. 1, the input range was set to 7V-11V, so the lead wires of the sensor and proximity switch were illegally shorted, the sensor and switch were removed from the connector, and the lead wires were cut and floated. Such an abnormal state can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The proximity I/F1
Among the outputs of 21, the detection signals of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the starting opening 3 switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a and the special winning opening switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. It Also, of the outputs of the proximity I/F 121,
The detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, the detection signal of the magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, and the gaming machine 1
Detection signal of the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of 0, the gaming machine 10
A detection signal of a main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like is also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

Of the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is the main board 10
It is also designed to be supplied from 0 to the test shot test device (not shown) via the relay board 70.
Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37
The detection signals of a and the starting port 3 switch 97a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is the enable signal CE when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the second input port 123.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave incorrect signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on a radio wave detected by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be accepted), a payout abnormality status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (Signal output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 in a predetermined amount or more (full)), touch switch signal (input to the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) There is provided a first input port 122 which receives a signal based on the above) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test shot test device via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is input to the ports 122, 123,
Not supplied to 124. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is set so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for notifying special test symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating a probability state of a big hit via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-production product) installed in a game shop. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starter switch output from the proximity I/F 121, is supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the board radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into another signal or information, for example, a game machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the test is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-shooting test apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test firing test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. At the port on the relay board 70, the game microcomputer 11
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-injection test apparatus.

The output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open a special variable winning device 38 (a special winning opening solenoid) 38b and a movable member 37 of the normal variable winning device 37.
Second for outputting the opening/closing data of the solenoid (universal solenoid) 37c for opening b
An output port 134 is provided. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. The fourth output port 136 for outputting ON/OFF data of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED is provided.

In addition, the output unit 130 outputs information about the gaming machine 10, such as jackpot information, to the external information terminal board 7.
A fifth output port 137 for outputting to 1 is provided. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, for example. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening/closing data signals of the special winning opening solenoid 38b and the universal electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal, which is a first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , The second driver 1 for outputting the ON/OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135
38b, a third driver 138c that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the fourth output port 136, and is supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137. A fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is provided.

To the first driver 138a, DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32V. Further, DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. The third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for pulling out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, and therefore the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential pulls out the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line, thereby providing a dynamic driving method. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs that are sequentially selected by, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided not on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the main board, but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 500. Photo coupler 13
9, the gaming microcomputer 111 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the data transmission/reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300, like the gaming microcomputer 111, is an amusement chip (IC).
A main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , A sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sounds for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a, 19b
Equipped with.

The main control microcomputer 311 has a program ROM 321 including a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and a storage content even if power is not supplied at the time of power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 that is a time counting unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect contents and instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to give a reproduced sound, lights a decorative lamp, and drives the motor. And drive control of solenoids, management of production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, it is possible to transmit commands and data in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives a data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
From the main control microcomputer 311 to the main control microcomputer 311 to wait for reception of the interrupt signals INT0-n and the command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 to notify the processing status such as the completion of drawing in the VRAM. The signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. Further, the interrupt signal INT is sent from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
Is entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 is provided. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Via this command I/F331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command and the like transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 are changed to the effect control command signal (effect command). ) As. Gaming microcomputer 111 of gaming control device 100
Operates at 5V DC, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at 3.3V DC, so the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

Further, in the effect control device 300, a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the glass frame 15 are provided. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided therein, and a board provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control the effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances effect effects in cooperation with effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340. The glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device including a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating an effect device), and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. Is also good.

Further, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. For detecting the ON/OFF state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch), and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311;
A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the configuration as described above.
A DC voltage of 32V for driving a motor or a solenoid, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, a DC 12V for driving a motor or an LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by the same or the like. DC5 that is the power supply voltage for the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving a motor, an LED, and a speaker. Furthermore, as the main control microcomputer 311, 3.3V or 1.2V
When using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as, DC 3.3V based on DC 5V
The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating or DC1.2V. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 and puts the device in the reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, And is supplied to an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, and the like to reset them. In addition, the production control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven when N45 is connected and the effect control device 300 is powered on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the universal figure starting gate 3
Based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in 4, the random number for hit determination of the universal figure is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and A process for determining whether or not there is a hit is performed. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the universal figure display 52, a process of displaying the universal figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is performed. When the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, the universal figure display 52 displays the special result mode corresponding to each of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol, and the ordinary electric solenoid 37c is turned on. The movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example, 0
． (5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) The opening control is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 1
00 constitutes conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition,
When the result of the general-picture variation display game is out of order, control is performed to display the out-of-position result mode on the general-picture display unit 52.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the first starting winning opening 36, the starting winning (starting memory) is stored, and based on this starting memory, the first special figure variation display A random number value for determining the big hit of the game is extracted and compared with the decision value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining the hit of the first special figure variation display game is performed. In addition, the starting memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37 and the starting opening 3 switch 97a provided in the second starting winning opening 97. Based on the start-up memory, a random number value for jackpot determination of the second special figure variation display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and processing for determining the hitting loss of the second special figure variation display game is performed. ..

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the first special figure variable display game or the second special figure variable display game described above. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display device 51a or the special figure 2 display device 51b, a process of displaying the special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is performed. That is, the game control device 100 of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game region 32 to the start winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal variation winning apparatus 37). It constitutes a game control means for controlling the progress.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game.
Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, setting of the effect state, output of sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, processing for controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display device 51a or the special figure 2 display device 51b and generates the special game state. Perform processing to In the process of generating the special game state, C
The PU 111A controls, for example, by opening the opening/closing door 38c of the special variation winning device 38 with the special winning opening solenoid 38b to allow the game balls to flow into the special winning opening. Then, until a condition that either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is won in the special winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening, the special winning opening is achieved. 1 to open
It is set as a round, and control (cycle game) for continuing (repeating) this a predetermined number of times is performed. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening opening/closing control unit that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result appearance becomes the special result appearance. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is off, control is performed to display the deviation result mode on the special figure 1 display device 51a or the special figure 2 display device 51b.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high-probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high-probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the normal probability state (low-probability state). In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure Both floating display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (also referred to as a high probability ratio state or a universal communication support state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. ing. In this short-time state, the probability of being a hit result of the universal figure fluctuation display game (probability per universal figure) is set to a high probability (normal probability high state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (low universal probability state). It is possible. As a result, the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case of the normal variation winning device 37 being in the normal figure low probability state.

In addition, the execution time of the universal figure variation display game, the universal figure stop time, the number of regular electricity opening, and the universal electricity open time are appropriately set so that the general figure variation display game and the regular variation winning device 37 are controlled to be in a time saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, the execution time (
It is possible to control the normal variation time) to be the second variation display time shorter than the first variation display time (for example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the universal figure stop time for displaying the result of the universal figure change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec is set). 704 ms). Further, in the time saving state, the universal figure variation display game is a winning result, and the ordinary variation winning device 37
When is released, it is possible to control the opening time (universal electric opening time) to be the second opening time longer than the first opening time in the normal state (universal figure low probability state) (for example, , 100
msec is 1352 msec). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of opening the normal electric power) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) with respect to one hit result of the universal figure changing display game. It is possible to set the number of times of opening (for example, four times) to the second number of times of opening.
Also, in the time-saving state, the probability that the hit result of the general figure fluctuation display game is the result (probability of hitting the general figure)
Can be set to a high probability (universal figure high probability state, eg, 250/251) higher than the normal probability in the normal operation state (universal figure low probability state, eg, 0/251).

In the time saving state, the ordinary variable winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the universal figure fluctuation time, the universal figure stop time, the number of universal communication opening, the universal communication opening time, and the probability of universal communication. Make the time for state conversion longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states that are different from each other. Further, in the case of a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be different. The high-probability state and the short-time state can occur independently of each other, both of them can occur at the same time, or only one of them can occur.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, first, a process of prohibiting an interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then, when the interrupt occurs, the start address of the area where the value of the register or the like is saved is saved. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and a predetermined register (
For example, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in the D register) (step S4)
). In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order, and the leading 00h is set in step S4. Next, a signal to stop firing is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the firing, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6),
A process for setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the sub-control means (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 that is the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device is activated. It is possible to prevent the device from dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. It forms a standby means for setting the standby time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (RAM area or register or the like that is not the target of validity determination) that is not the target of RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). This makes it possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated because it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area when calculating the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122,
By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the waiting time, the initialization switch 11
The operation 2 can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the waiting time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the waiting time, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on until the waiting time elapses. Need to continue. However, by reading the status before the start of the waiting time, it will be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such a troublesome operation, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power Can be prevented from being accepted.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed.
First, the number of times (for example, twice) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Is performed (step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). When the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (step S10;
N) returns to the determination (step S9) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, it waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. in this way,
By determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the power failure due to noise, etc. ..

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shutdown are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the timer value is 0. Is determined (step S12). If the timer value is not 0 (step S
12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the timer value is 0 (step S
12; Y), that is, when the waiting time is over, access to the read/write RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13), and off data is output to all output ports (output). Is set) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port that is pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15), and read in advance. From the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122), it is determined whether the initialization switch is turned on (step S16).

If the initialization switch is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step S17), If normal (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), RW
Checksum calculation processing for calculating the checksum of a predetermined area in M is performed (step S19).
), it is determined whether the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power failure match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), step S2 in FIG.
Go to 1 and perform the processing when the power is restored normally.

In addition, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y),
If it is determined that the value of the power failure inspection area is not normal power failure inspection area check data (step S17; N or step S18; N), and if the checksums do not match (step S20; N), The process proceeds to step S26 of 7 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation section that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 1
00 serves as an initialization unit that initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit.

In step S21 of FIG. 7, the initial value when power is restored is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area that stores the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal is not finalized. Indefinite. Similarly, the touch switch signal status monitoring area that stores the status of the touch switch signal is also cleared,
The state of the touch switch signal is set to an undefined state indicating that the state is not fixed. Then RW
The area for storing the game state in M is checked to determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state (step S22). If the probability of the special figure is not high (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. In addition, when the high probability of the special figure is in progress (step S22; Y), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30. The ON (lighting) data of is saved in the segment area (step S24). Then, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S25).
), and proceeds to step S31. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, and the screen designation command (commands for the customer wait demo screen if there are customers waiting, other commands) If so, send multiple commands (such as the command on the recovery screen).

On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step S26), and all of the busy signal status area and touch switch signal state monitoring area are included. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is the customer waiting demonstration area and the area related to the setting of the effect mode. Then, the command for the RAM initialization is given to the production control board (production control device 300).
To (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of this embodiment, step S
In 30, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the RAM initialization command (display the customer waiting demo screen, and a predetermined time (
For example, for 30 seconds), a plurality of commands such as a command for informing the RAM initialization by light and sound are transmitted.

In step S31, a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator)
Perform the process to activate the circuit. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111 sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
Performed by A. Also, a bit transposed pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). Is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, the user may arbitrarily set it.

After that, a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on
Value of the corresponding initial value random number (in the case of the present embodiment, a random number that determines the winning symbol of the special drawing (big hit symbol random number), a random number that determines the hit of the universal symbol (random number per hit), After saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) of a random number (winning symbol random number) for determining a winning symbol (step S33), interruption is permitted (step S34). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step S35) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit design random number, the hit random number, and the hit design random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. There is. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are timer interrupts that are processing units of the program. CTC output with the same cycle as processing (CT different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing)
It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on C(CTC2). In addition, in the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, the so-called "initial value changing method" is adopted in which the start value is changed each time the random number makes a round by using each initial value random number (generated by software). There is. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter method by +1 or -1, or may be updated by a random method in which all the values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number updating process of step S35, the number of times (for example, two) to check by checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 through the port and the data bus is set (step S36), It is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S
37). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S35). That is, when the power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By enabling the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number updating process (step S35), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt process by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number updating process in step S35 described above includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating process even in the timer interrupt process. In order to prevent the value random number update process from being executed, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update the interrupt to cancel the interrupt. There is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number updating process when the initial value random number updating process is not performed in the timer interrupt process and only in the main process.
This has the advantage that the main process is simplified.

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38).
.. Then, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S3
8; N) returns to the determination (step S37) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, a process of temporarily interrupting is performed (step S39).
), a process of outputting off data to all output ports (step S40) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41
), the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42).
Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating the checksum when the RWM is powered off and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step S45), it waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power shutdown is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in general, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) for performing various controls according to the instructions from the main control means. ), and the main control means delays the start of the main control means when the power is turned on, and sets a predetermined waiting time for waiting for the start of the slave control device (game control device 100), and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined standby time.

In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.
Further, the main control means (game control device 100), RAM111C capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, an initialization unit (game control device 100) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit, The operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.
In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) allows access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 8 shows the initial value random number updating process (step S35) in the above-mentioned main process. In the initial value random number updating process, first, the jackpot symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61). Then, the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S62), the hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S63), and the initial value random number updating process is ended.
Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure variation display game. Also, the "winning initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the universal figure fluctuation display game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that determines the hit stop symbol of the universal figure fluctuation display game. Is a random number that is the initial value of. in this way,
The randomness of the random numbers can be increased by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, the timer interrupt processing is
The periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is the CPU 1
It is started by being input to 11A. When a timer interrupt is generated in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 9 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step S1).
01). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing the register saving process of moving the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S104) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (special winning opening solenoid 38b, universal electric solenoid 37c) is performed.
When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of launch permission as seen from the game control device, and the second signal indicating the state of launch permission seen from the payout control device (the launch permission signal) is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the firing control device. That is,
Two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both of them are allowed to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step S105) of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (step S106),
Random number update processing 2 (step S107) is performed. After that, it is monitored whether or not a normal signal is input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 97a, the universal gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a. Alternatively, a winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S108) for monitoring an error (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened) is performed. In addition, a special figure game process (step S109) for performing a special figure variable display game and a general figure game process (step S110) for performing a general figure variable display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED edit process (step S111) for driving the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 for displaying the special figure variation display game and various information regarding the game so as to display desired contents, the magnetic sensor 61. Magnet irregularity monitoring processing (step S112) for checking the detection signal from the panel to determine whether there is an abnormality, and panel radio irregularity for checking the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality Monitoring process (step S1
13) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S114) of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt process is ended.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by the interrupt return. At this time (at the end of timer interrupt processing), it is automatically performed. Depending on the CPU to be used, there is also a gaming machine in which it is necessary to instruct execution of a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state and a process of restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S105) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 10, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The number-of-wins counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on a prize ball command.
The number-of-wins counter area 2 is for transmitting a main award ball signal to be output to an external device each time the number of award balls (scheduled payout number) generated by winning the prize is reached to a predetermined number (here, 10). In the area to be used, winning data corresponding to the prize balls for which the main prize ball signal has not been generated is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 constitutes a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, the payout prize ball signal is output from the payout control device 200 to the external device each time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). And by comparing these two signals,
It is possible to monitor unauthorized payouts.

In each of these prize number counter areas, there is a prize number counter area for each number of prize balls set for each prize hole (in the present embodiment, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). Is provided, and the count number of the corresponding prize number counter area is incremented by 1 based on the winning of the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The prize number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the prize number counter area 2 so that more prize data can be stored. This is because while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 which is the destination, so that more untransmitted This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, the three award ball counter areas of the winning number counter area 1, 10
Up to 65535 prizes can be stored in the individual prize ball counter area and the 14 prize ball counter area, respectively, and the three prize ball counter area, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize prize of the prize number counter area 2 can be stored. The ball counter area is configured to store up to 255 prizes.

In the process of checking whether there is a count in the number-of-wins counter area 2 (step S181), “0” is set in the number-of-wins counter area to be checked, out of the plurality of number-of-wins counter areas provided for each number of prize balls. Determine whether there is a count number that is not. Then, when there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is checked whether the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas have been checked. The determination is made (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. on the other hand,
If it is determined that all the checks are not completed (step S183; N), step S
Returning to step 181, the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area→10 prize ball counter area→14 prize ball counter area.

If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count (step S181; Y), the count of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184).
, Obtains the number of payouts corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 2 (step S18).
5). Then, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S187). As the value of the remaining award ball area before this processing, a fraction less than a predetermined number serving as a reference for the output of the main award ball signal is stored.

Then, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189), and if it is not 0 (step S189; N), the step S
The processing moves to 192. If it is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the number of remaining prize balls reaches 10, the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls (step S191), and step S18
Return to the process of 8. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information about the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with winning of the game balls to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of the game balls is concentrated during a big hit, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game balls, and the exact result of the big hit occurs. It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of special prize balls cannot be counted.
Here, the processing of steps S181 to S191 is processing of updating (increasing) the number of times the main prize ball signal is output, and the processing of steps S192 to S201 is processing of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S1).
93). When the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is ended. When the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S194).
The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. If the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control, the payout busy signal indicates an on state (busy state). To be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal is a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control.

When the payout busy signal is busy (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is ended. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time has elapsed (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 side can pay out the prize ball. If it is in a state, it is configured to send a payout command. As described above, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform unnecessary processing by not performing the subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. We are trying to prevent this and reduce the burden of control.
Conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the on state (busy state) are, for example, during payout operation, during ball lending operation, during shot ball out error, overflow error, during frame radio wave illegal occurrence, payout ball detection switch (paid ball). The number of award balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 (the number of award balls not paid out = the number of remaining game balls remaining) ) (When not equal to 0), etc.

When the payout busy signal is not busy (step S194; N), it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). Prize counter area 1
In the process of checking whether there is a count in step S195 (step S195), among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls, there is a count number other than "0" in the prize number counter area to be checked. Determine whether.

Then, if there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196) to check whether the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas have been checked. The determination is made (step S197). With this judgment,
When it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks are not completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area→10 prize ball counter area→14 prize ball counter area.

If it is determined in step S195 that there is a count (step S195; Y), the count in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198).
, The payout number command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step S199). Then, the obtained payout number command is written into the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 msec, for example, is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) indicating whether the payout control means can start the payout control can start the payout control. In this case, the prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means is formed.
In this way, the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the prize is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not yet been paid out will be held in the game control device 100 side, and will be backed up in the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and will be backed up in the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without the function for performing.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, in conventional gaming machines, a function for backing up is required,
There was a problem that it would lead to higher costs. According to the present invention, it is possible to realize accurate payout control without providing the payout control device 200 with a function for backing up.
Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, it is possible to output the main prize ball signal without delay, and the external device such as the hall computer does not pay the prize balls. The time can be accurately grasped, and for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since a prize ball command counter capable of storing information about the prize ball command and a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information about the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings. The signal information can be managed separately, and the information can be managed reliably.

From the above, while performing the game control comprehensively, the winning area provided in the gaming area 32 (the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal variation winning device 37, the general winning opening 35.
, A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of a game ball to the special variation winning device 38) and a prize ball command transmitted from the game control device. A payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control is provided, and the game control means outputs a status signal (busy) indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. The control for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means is performed based on the signal), and when a power failure occurs and the power is restored, a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means. Even if it is done, the state signal indicating that the payout control means can start the payout control is not output immediately to the payout control means, and the status signal is continuously output for a predetermined period. Then, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

In addition, the game area 32 is provided with a plurality of winning areas having different numbers of prize balls (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal variation winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variation winning device 38), and a game. The control means (game control device 100) is provided with a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying, for each number of prize balls, whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of game balls has been transmitted. The signal indicates that the payout control can be started, and when each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200). ,
The state signal determines whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control, before specifying whether or not each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command. It will be.

In addition, the game control is performed comprehensively, and a predetermined winning area (first start winning opening 36, second
A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on a winning of a game ball to the start winning port 97, the normal variation winning device 37, the general winning port 35, and the special variation winning device 38), and the game control. Based on the prize ball command transmitted from the means, payout control means for performing payout control of game balls (
The payout control device 200) is provided, and the game control means indicates that the state signal output from the payout control means indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control can start the payout control. In the case of showing, the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means, and the information regarding the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the game ball in the predetermined winning area. And an external information output means (game control device 100) for outputting a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including the outside to the game machine, and the external information output means is a state signal output from the payout control means. The award ball signal is output regardless of whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control.

In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives the prize ball command even if the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started in the event of a power failure and recovery from the power failure. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200) and the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started in response to the award ball command corresponding to the state continuing for a predetermined period. This means that the information is sent to the payout control means.

In addition, the game control means (game control device 100), the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information on the prize ball command, and the prize capable of storing information on the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). The ball signal counter (game control device 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) has a predetermined winning area (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal variation winning device). 37, the general winning opening 35, the special variation winning device 38) generates a prize ball command in units of one prize, and if the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, one prize ball command Is configured to be transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) can store the information of the prize in units of one prize in a predetermined prize area. Yes, the number of award ball commands that have not been transmitted is memorized by updating the game balls at the time of winning in a predetermined winning area and updating the award ball command to the payout control means. The external information output means accumulates the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the game balls to the predetermined prize area, and outputs the prize ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine each time the cumulative value reaches the predetermined number. The prize ball signal counter is capable of storing information of the prize in units of one prize in a predetermined prize area, and is updated when a game ball is prized in the predetermined prize area. At the same time, the number of prize balls that has not been accumulated can be stored by updating the number of prize balls that has been accumulated by the external information output means.

[Winning prize switch/Status monitoring processing]
FIG. 11 shows a winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S1) in the timer interrupt process.
08). In this winning opening switch/state monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the winning openings switch (special variation winning device 38) winning openings switch 38a is prepared (step S301). The fraud & prize monitoring process of monitoring whether there is an illegal prize in the big winning opening and detecting a normal prize even if the prize is not opened (step S302).
) Is executed.
After that, the winning a prize monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other winning a prize opening switch 38a in the award winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning and a normal winning is made. The fraud & winning prize detection process (step S304) to be detected is executed.

In the prize-winning mouth monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input to the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of the fraudulent winning number area,
The information on the illegal prize winning error notification command, the upper limit value of the illegal prize winning number (the number of illegal occurrence determinations), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the notification timer update information (permission/update) is defined. In addition, the number of repeats of monitoring (number of switches) is displayed in the winning table of the winning port monitoring table.
In addition, the information of the monitoring switch bit, the lower address of the winning number counter area 1 and the lower address of the winning number counter area 2 is defined for each switch. The prize hole monitoring table is prepared in accordance with each switch to be monitored.

Next, prepare a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in Hoden (step S305), monitor whether there is an illegal winning, and detect fraud & winning monitoring processing to detect a normal winning. (Step S306) is executed. Then, a winning opening switch (for example, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 3 switch 9) that can always win a prize (no need for fraudulent monitoring processing)
7a, the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35 (left winning opening switch, right winning opening switch)
) Is prepared (step S307), the winning number counter updating process (step S308) for updating the winning number is performed, and the starting port error monitoring process (step S309).
I do.

Next, the state scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals whose states should be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step S310). In the case of this embodiment, the status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. After that, the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the status scan counter (step S311). Then, a gaming machine status check process (step S312) for determining a status such as whether an error has occurred.
In the case of the present embodiment, by referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like. The monitoring of the state based on the 1 signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "1", the monitoring of the state based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. It

Next, the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the status to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the status scan counter (step S313). Then, a gaming machine status check process (step S314) for determining a status such as whether an error has occurred is performed.
In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, the glass frame opening detection switch 63
The status monitoring is set based on the signal output from the, and the status scan counter value is "1".
If it is, the state monitoring is set based on the signal output from the main frame opening detection switch 64. When the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the frame radio wave incorrect signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the touch switch signal is monitored. Is set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S315), and if the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S315; N), the winning opening switch/status monitoring process finish. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S315; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S316).
), a gaming machine status check process for determining a status such as an error (step S)
317) is performed.
In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, when the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to occurrence of a switch connector disconnection or the like. Monitoring of conditions based on two signals is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is "1" to "3".

After that, the payout control device 200 performs a payout busy signal check process (step S318) for checking a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control can be started, and ends the winning opening switch/state monitoring process. Note that the processing of steps S316 to S318 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is "0", so that it is executed once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 msec, the processes of steps S316 to S318 are performed every 16 msec.

[Special game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (step S109) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the special figure game process, the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37
a, the input of the starting port 3 switch 97a, the control of the entire process relating to the special figure variation display game, and the setting of the display of the special figure.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the special figure game process, first, the opening 1 switch 36a and the opening 2
A start opening switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winning of the switch 37a and the start opening 3 switch 97a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, if there is a winning game ball in the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the normal variation winning device 37, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted to win the winning. Before the special figure variation display game based on it, a game result pre-judgment for pre-judging the game result based on the winning is performed.
Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this special winning opening switch monitoring processing, processing for monitoring the detection of a game ball with the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). The value of the special figure game processing timer is "
If it is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if it has timed up or has already timed up, the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is registered. (Step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6).
Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "0", the start of fluctuation of the special figure variable display game is monitored, and setting of fluctuation start of the special figure variable display game, effect setting, and special figure changing are in progress. Special figure normal processing (step A8) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
If the special figure game process number is "1" at step A7, the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure and the information necessary for performing the special figure displaying process are performed. (Step A
Perform 9).

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "2" and the game result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, setting of fanfare commands according to the type of big hit, and big winning holes for each big hit Special figure display processing (step A10) for setting fanfare time according to the opening pattern and setting information necessary for performing fanfare/interval processing
)I do.
In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "3", the opening time of the special winning opening, the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening, etc. are performed. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step A11).

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "4", the interval command is set if the jackpot round is not the final round, while the ending command is set if the jackpot round is the final round, and the special winning opening remains. A special winning opening opening process (step A12) for setting information necessary for performing the ball process is performed.
In step A7, if the special figure game process number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening and the big hit end process are executed. Special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) for setting the information necessary to perform
I do.
When the special figure game process number is "6" at step A7, a big hit ending process (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure normal process is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51a (step A15), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A16) relating to the special figure 1 display 51a is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display device 51b (step A17).
), the symbol variation control process (step A18) relating to the special figure 2 display 51b is performed, and the special figure game process is ended. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A15 and the subsequent processes are performed. To do.

The big hit is a special result involving the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure variation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and special condition as a special electric accessory. Variable winning device 38
Means that a specific flag for continuously operating the character is set (the accessory continuous operation device is operated). The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Further, the "conditional device" is a term that is generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term that has different meanings.

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, in the starting port switch monitoring process, first, a first starting port (first starting winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target starting port switch (here, the starting port 1 switch 36a), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target starting port is set. The information indicating that the prize has been won is set. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the first starting opening which is the starting opening of the special figure 1 (step A103).
When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the first starting opening (step A103
In N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning in the first starting opening (step A103
In 103;Y), it is determined whether or not the special time saving is in progress (supporting universal communication) (step A).
104).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing is not shortened (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing is being shortened (step A104;
In Y), a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. That is, in the time saving state, a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first start opening (first start winning opening 36) does not win unless the player hits left, and the normal variable winning apparatus 37 does not win unless he hits right. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the right-handed state is more advantageous in the gaming state than the left-handed state, but when there is a winning in the first starting mouth during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state). In addition, the right control instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) for instructing the right control.
Next, after preparing the table for setting the information of the hold by the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) (step A107), the special figure starting opening switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37) is prepared for a prize monitoring table (step A1).
09), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when the target starting port switch (starting port 2 switch 37a in this case) is input, the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target starting port is set. The information indicating that the prize has been won is set. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the second starting opening which is the starting opening of the special figure 2 (step A111).
When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the second starting opening (step A111)
In N), the process proceeds to step A116 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning in the second starting opening (step A111)
111; Y), the ordinary electric auditors (ordinary variation winning device 37) is in operation, that is,
It is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is activated and the gaming ball is in the open state in which a prize can be won (step A112), and it is determined that the normal electric auditors product is operating (step A112; Y). , And proceeds to the processing of step A114 to perform the subsequent processing. On the other hand, step A
When it is determined in 112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the illegal electric power generation is occurring (step A113).

At step A113, it is determined that the fraud has occurred if the number of fraudulent prizes to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or more than the fraud determination number (for example, 5). Ordinary variable winning device 37,
The game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore,
When the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and when there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the fraudulent winning number. When the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

If it is determined in step A113 that the illegal attempt to generate a telephone call is not occurring (step A113; N
) Prepares a table for setting information on hold by the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37) (step A114), performs special figure starting opening switch common processing (step A115), and then performs processing of step A116. And the subsequent processing is performed. Also, step A113
If it is determined that the illegal call is occurring (step A113; Y), step A1
The process moves to 16 and the subsequent processes are performed.

Next, a third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) winning award monitoring table is prepared (step A11).
6), a hard random number acquisition process (step A117) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process,
When there is an input to the target starting port switch (here, the starting port 3 switch 97a), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the fact that the target starting port is won Set the information shown. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the third starting opening which is the starting opening of the special figure 2 (step A118).
When it is determined in step A118 that there is no winning in the third starting opening (step A118)
;N) ends the starting port switch monitoring process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A118 that there is a winning in the third starting opening (step A118).
In step 118;Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing is in a shorter working time (usually supported by the Denden) (step A).
119).

When it is determined in step A119 that it is not during the special drawing time saving (step A119; N), the process proceeds to step A122 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A119 that the special drawing is being shortened (step A119;
For Y), a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A120), and effect command setting processing (step A121) is performed. That is, in the time saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A120), and effect command setting processing (step A121) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the third start opening (the second start winning opening 97) must be left-handed to win, and the normal variable winning apparatus 37 must be right-handed to win. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the right-handed state is more advantageous than the left-handed state in the gaming state, but when there is a winning in the third starting port during the time-shortened state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state) In addition, the right control instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) for instructing the right control.
Next, after preparing a table for setting the information on hold by the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) (step A122), the special figure starting opening switch common processing (step A123) is performed to monitor the starting opening switch. The process ends.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) in the above-mentioned starting opening switch monitoring process.
, A110, A117) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 14, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, a first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) and a second starting opening (ordinary variation winning device 3).
7) and the third starting opening (the second starting winning opening 97), the non-winning information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A131), and the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a,
Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the starting port switch to be monitored of the starting port 3 switch 97a (step A132).
Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A132; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends.
On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A132; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A133), and it is determined whether the target random number latch register has latch data (step A134). ..

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends.
If the target random number latch register has latch data (step A134; Y)
Loads the extracted jackpot random number into the monitored hard random number latch register and prepares it (step A135). Then, of the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36), the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37), and the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97), the winning opening of the monitored opening is monitored. The presence information is set (step A136), and the hard random number acquisition process ends.

[Common processing for special drawing start switch]
Next, details of the special figure starting port switch common process (steps A108, A115, A123) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a are input.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the special figure starting port switch common processing, first, the starting port 1 switch 36
a, a starting opening 2 switch 37a, and a starting opening 3 switch 97a, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of winnings to the starting opening switch to be monitored is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10 The output count is loaded (step A141), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A142), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A14).
3).
If the output count does not overflow (step A143; N), the updated value is RW.
It is saved in the M number of times of starting port signal output (step A144), and the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A143; Y), step A1
The process shifts to the process of 45. In the present embodiment, the starting port signal output frequency range is set from "0" to "255".
Values up to "" can be stored. When the loaded value is "255", the value after updating becomes "0" by the +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows and is not saved.

Next, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97.
In a, it is determined whether the number of special figure suspension (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (step A145).
If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A145; N), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends.
If the number of reserved special maps to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A145; Y), the number of reserved special maps to be updated (special map 1 reserved number or special map 2 reserved number) is updated by +1 ( Step A14
6) Prepare a starter switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure reservation number (step A147), perform effect command setting processing (step A148), and set the target start mouth winning flag. It is saved (step A149). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations is calculated (step A150).
The jackpot random numbers prepared in the hard random number acquisition processing of steps A102, A110, and A117 are saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (step A151). Next, the big hit symbol random number of the starting mouth switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A152), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A153). This big hit symbol random number is used in the special figure reservation information determination process (step A157).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 2 in the case of the present embodiment) are saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A154).
Next, the address of the variable order flag storage area (any place from the hold 1 to 8) corresponding to the total of the number of special maps 1 and the number of special maps 2 to be reserved is calculated (step A155), and the calculated region is targeted. The variation order flag of (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is saved (step A156), special figure holding information determination processing (step A157) is performed, and the special figure starting port switch common processing ends.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the inflow of the game balls into the starting winning area of the normal variation winning device 37. As a starting memory that is the right to execute the variable display game, the starting memory means stores a predetermined number as an upper limit. In addition, the starting storage means (game control device 100) is a random number value extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 36 which is the starting opening of the special FIG. The second start is stored as a start memory, and various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 97 which is the starting opening of the special figure 2 and the normal variation winning device 37 are set to a predetermined number as the upper limit. Remember as a memory.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the special figure holding information determination process (step A in the special figure starting port switch common process described above).
157) will be described in detail. The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetch process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 16, first, a low-probability determination flag is prepared (step A161), and pre-reading is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (jackpot low probability determination value). The big hit determination process (step A162) is performed, and it is determined whether the big hit is set as the determination result (step A163).
When it is determined in step A163 that the big hit is set as the determination result (step A163
163; Y) sets a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch (step A164), and obtains stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A152 (step A165). , The process proceeds to step A167.
On the other hand, in step A163, when it is determined that the big hit is not set as the determination result (step A163; N), that is, when the deviation is set as the determination result, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (step A166). ), and proceeds to the processing of step A167.

In step A167, the stop symbol information or step A acquired in step A165
The stop symbol information set in 166 is saved in the symbol information area (step A167).
Then, the pre-read stop symbol command (corresponding to the target opening switch and stop symbol information (
(Low probability) is prepared (step A168), and effect command setting processing (step A169) is performed.
Next, the high-probability determination flag is prepared (step A170), and the pre-reading big-hit determination process (step A171) for determining whether or not the big-hit random number value matches the big-hit judgment value (big-hit high probability judgment value) is a big hit. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit is set as the determination result (step A172).
When it is determined in step A172 that the big hit is set as the determination result (step A
172; Y), set the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch (step A173), and obtain the stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A152 (step A174). ), and proceeds to the processing of step A176.
On the other hand, in step A172, when it is determined that the big hit is not set as the determination result (step A172; N), that is, when the deviation is set as the determination result, stop symbol information of the deviation is set (step A175), and proceeds to the processing of step A176.

In step A176, it is determined whether or not there is a high probability of a special figure (step A176).
When it is determined in step A176 that the special figure is not in high probability (step A176; N)
If so, the process proceeds to step A178.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A176 that the probability of the special figure is high (step A176
; Y), in the symbol information area where the stop symbol information is saved in step A167, the stop symbol information acquired in step A174 or the stop symbol information set in step A175 is overwritten and saved (step A177). , The process proceeds to step A178. In addition,
The stop symbol information saved in the symbol information area is used for prefetching the variation pattern.

In step A178, a read-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A178), and effect command setting processing (step A179) is performed. Thus, in the present embodiment, each time the special figure reservation information determination process is executed, the result determined by the big hit low probability determination value and the result determined by the big hit high probability determination value are
The performance control device 300 is transmitted.
Next, a special figure information setting process (step A180) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A180). A181).

After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to a variation pattern number indicating a variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A182), effect command setting processing is performed (step A183), and special figure pending information determination is performed. The process ends. The special figure information setting process in step A180 and the variation pattern setting process in step A181 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, the prefetch stop symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory of the prefetch target, and the prefetch variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory are It is prepared and transmitted to the performance control device 300.
Thus, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of the variation pattern) corresponding to the starting memory is controlled before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory. The device 300 can be informed, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure changing display game. It becomes possible to inform.
That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether a special result is obtained or not). Determine whether or not) Make a pre-determination means. Note that the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance not only at the time of the winning prize when the starting memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is performed. Good.

[Normal processing of special drawings]
Next, details of the special figure normal process (step A8) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether both the special figure 1 reserved number and the special figure 2 reserved number are “0” (step A301).
If it is determined in step A301 that the number of special maps 1 and the number of special maps 2 are not "0" (step A301; N), a flag is loaded from the variable order flag storage area (for a total of 1 reserves). Then, (step A302), it is determined whether or not the current variation is the variation of special figure 1 (step A303).
When it is determined in step A303 that the current variation is the variation of special figure 1 (step A3
03; Y), a decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared (step A).
304), effect command setting processing (step A305), special figure 1 variation start processing (step A306), and special figure normal processing ends. At this point, the special figure 1 reserved number is not updated by -1, but in step A304, a command (decorated special figure reserved number command) corresponding to the -1 updated value is prepared.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A303 that the current variation is not the variation in special figure 1 (step A303; N), that is, if the current variation is the variation in special figure 2, the number corresponding to the special figure 2 hold is supported. The decorative special figure reservation number command to be prepared is prepared (step A307), effect command setting processing (step A308) is performed, special figure 2 variation start processing (step A309) is performed, and the special figure normal processing is ended. At this point, the special figure 2 reserved number is not updated by -1, but in step A307, the command corresponding to the -1 updated value (decorated special figure reserved number command).
To prepare.

If it is determined in step A301 that both the special figure 1 pending number and the special figure 2 pending number are "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started ( If the customer waiting demo has already started (step A310) (step A310; Y), the process proceeds to step A315.
If the customer waiting demo has not started (step A310; N), the customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A311).
Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A312), and effect command setting processing (step A313) is performed. After that, an initial value (for example, a value corresponding to 5 minutes) is saved in the customer waiting demo progress timer area for monitoring the elapse of a certain time from the start of the customer waiting state (step A314), and the process proceeds to step A315.

If the customer waiting demo elapsed timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step A315), "0" which is related to special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A316), and the processing number is changed to the special figure game processing number. Save in the area (step A317) and clear the variable symbol determination flag area (step A318). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A319), and the special figure normal process is ended.

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start processing (step A306) in the above-described special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 18A, first, a special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the variation symbol determination flag area (step A32).
1), the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a big hit is subjected to big hit flag 1 setting processing (step A322) for setting deviation information and big hit information.

Next, special figure 1 stop design setting processing concerning the setting of special figure 1 stop design (design information) (step A)
323) is performed, a special figure information setting process (step A324) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and various kinds of setting relating to the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game are performed. A special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing information is set, is prepared (step A325). After that, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A327) is performed.
Next, "1" for the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A328).
, The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A329).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal related to the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the blinking control timer (special figure 1 indicator 5
The initial value (for example, 100 msec) of the blinking period timer of 1a) is saved (step A3).
33), save the initial value (for example, 0) in the special symbol 1 variable symbol number area (step A33).
4), the special figure 1 variation start process is ended.

[Special map 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start processing (step A309) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and is the same as the process of the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. It is intended for memory.

As shown in FIG. 18B, first, a special figure 2 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the variation symbol determination flag area (step A341).
The big hit flag 2 setting processing (step A342) for setting the deviation information and the big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the second special figure variation display game is a big hit.

Next, special figure 2 stop design setting processing (step A) relating to the setting of special figure 2 stop design (design information)
343), after performing special figure information setting processing (step A344) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern, various kinds of settings relating to the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game are performed. A special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to information is set, is prepared (step A345). After that, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed.
Next, "1" for the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A348).
, The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A349).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal related to fluctuation start of the special figure 2 (for example, a special symbol 2 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the blinking control timer (special figure 2 indicator 5
The initial value (for example, 100 msec) of the blinking period timer of 1b) is saved (step A3).
53), save the initial value (for example, 0) in the special symbol 2 variable symbol number area (step A35).
4) and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 19, in the special figure changing process, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the changing symbol determination flag is prepared (step A501), and an effect command setting process (step A50).
Perform 2).
Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number is set (step A503),
The set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A504). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a falling symbol pattern, the display time is 8
00 msec is set, and when the stop symbol pattern is the big hit symbol pattern, 2000 msec is set as the display time.
It should be noted that the display time may be set to a short time (for example, 500 ms) when a sitting one-shot effect is performed.
Next, "2" related to the special figure display process is set as the process number (step A505).
, The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A506).

Then, the signal related to the end of fluctuation of special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 signal during fluctuation OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A507), and the signal related to end of fluctuation of special figure 2 (for example, special symbol 2) Save the changing signal OFF to the test signal output data area (
(Step A508), the control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) is saved in the symbol fixed number signal control timer area related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game for output to the external information terminal (
Step A509). After that, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51a, the stop flag related to the variation stop on the special figure 1 display device 51a is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (step A510). ), as the information for controlling the special figure 2 variation display game on the special figure 2 display device 51b, a stop flag related to the variation stop on the special figure 2 display device 51b is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area (step (A511), the special figure changing process is ended.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, details of the special figure displaying process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, in the special figure displaying process, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process and the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process The big hit flag 2 set in step 2 is loaded (step A601), and processing for clearing the big hit flag 1 area and big hit flag 2 area of the RWM (step A602) is performed. Then, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (
Step A603), if it is determined that the big hit (step A603; Y), a test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, character product Signal is ON during continuous operation device is ON, signal per special symbol 2 is ON)
The data is saved in the M test signal output data area (step A606), and the round number upper limit value table is set (step A607).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A603 that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A603; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot ((
If it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (step A604; Y), a test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the accessory device is ON, and the accessory character is ON) regarding the start of the big hit (TOKYO 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game. Signal is ON during continuous operation device is ON, signal per special symbol is ON) RW
It is saved in the test signal output data area of M (step A605) and the round number upper limit value table is set (step A607).

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A607), the round number upper limit value (16R or 6R in the case of the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the round number upper limit of the RWM is acquired. The data is saved in the value area (step A608). Continuously, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the round LED of the RWM is obtained.
The data is saved in the pointer area (step A609).

Next, the decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop design pattern is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared (step A610), and the effect command setting processing (step A61).
Perform 3). After that, a probability information command related to the information that sets the probability of a hit result in the ordinary figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A612), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A613) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command is prepared in accordance with the presence/absence of the sitting one shot effect execution flag set in the special figure information setting process (step A614), and the effect command setting process (step A615) is performed.

Then, the fanfare time is set according to the presence/absence of the sitting one shot effect execution flag (step A616), and the sitting one shot effect execution flag is cleared (step A617). As the fanfare time, 10000 ms is set when there is no sitting one shot effect execution flag, and 100 ms is set when there is a sitting one shot effect execution flag.
Then, the fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A61).
8) Clear the special winning opening illegal prize number area of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) corresponding to the big winning opening opening information (step A619), and set the big winning opening corresponding to the big winning opening opening information. Save the flag outside the fraud monitoring period in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A620).
). After that, the fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing 1 (step A621)
Then, the special figure displaying process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step A604, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A604
; N) performs a high-probability fluctuation number update process that is a process of managing the number of special-figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in a high-probability state (step A622). Is set (step A623), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A624).
Next, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A625), the flag during fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A626), and the special figure displaying process is ended.

[Public game processing]
Next, details of the universal figure game process (step S110) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the general figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process relating to the general figure variation display game is controlled, the display of the general figure is set, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 21, in the universal figure game process, first, the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and the universal electric prize switch for monitoring the input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the universal figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the universal figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the universal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4).

When the value of the universal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already expired, it is referred to branch to the process corresponding to the universal figure game processing number. A process of setting the universal figure game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and a process of acquiring a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the universal figure game process number is performed using the table (step B6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the universal figure game processing number (step B7).

In step B7, if the general figure game process number is "0", the start of variation of the general figure variation display game is monitored, and setting of variation start of the general figure variation display game, effect setting, and variation of general figure are performed. The normal/universal process (step B8) is performed to set the information necessary for the process.
When the figure game process number is "1" in step B7, a figure figure changing process (step B9) is performed to set information necessary for performing the figure image displaying process.

Further, in step B7, if the universal figure game processing number is "2", if the result of the universal figure variable display game is a hit, the universal battery open time is set according to whether or not the state is in a time saving state. In addition, processing for displaying a general figure (step B10) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the processing for displaying a general figure.
Further, in step B7, when the figure game processing number is "3", the figure is hit during the figure hit, the process is continued during the figure hit, or the information necessary for performing the ball remaining ball process is set. The process (step B11) is performed.

If the universal figure game process number is "4" at step B7, the ordinary electric ball remaining process (step B12) for setting the information necessary for performing the universal figure per end process is performed.
If the figure/universal figure game process number is "5" in step B7, a figure/universal figure end process (step B13) is performed to set information necessary for performing the figure/general figure normal process.

After that, after preparing a universal figure variation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal symbol display 52 (step B14), a symbol variation control process relating to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal symbol display 52 ( The step B15) is carried out to end the ordinary figure game process.
On the other hand, in step B4, the value of the universal figure game processing timer is not "0" (step B4;
N), that is, if it is determined that the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary process (step B8) in the above-mentioned ordinary figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the normal/universal figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal figure reservation number is “0” (step B301). When the normal/universal figure reservation number is “0” (step B301; Y )
Sets the processing number "0" which is related to the ordinary processing in the ordinary figure (step B322), saves the processing number in the ordinary figure game processing number area (step B323), and illegally monitors in the ordinary electric fraud monitoring period flag area. The flag is saved during the period (step B324), and the normal/universal figure normal processing ends.

On the other hand, if the universal figure reservation number is not "0" (step B301; N), the random number is stored from the RWM per random number storage area (for reservation number 1), per symbol random number storage area (for reservation number 1), The loaded area (that is, hit random number storage area (holding number 1), hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1)) is cleared to 0 (step B302), and the hit result is obtained in the universal figure variation display game. Whether the probability is higher than the normal probability (that is, the low probability of universal figure) during the high probability of universal figure,
That is, it is determined whether or not the time saving state is in progress (step B303).

If it is not during the high probability of universal figure (step B303; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit determination value) at the time of low probability of universal figure is set (step B304), and if it is during high probability of universal figure (step B).
303; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of high probability of universal figure (step B305).
After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (step B306). It is determined whether the value is less than the lower limit determination value set by (step B3
07).

When the value of the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (step B306; Y), or when the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B3
07; Y) saves the deviation information in the hit flag area (step B308), sets the deviation stop symbol number (step B309), and saves the deviation symbol information in the general figure stop symbol information area (step B310). , The stop symbol number is saved in the universal symbol stop symbol area (step B314).
On the other hand, when the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B
311), the hit stop symbol number corresponding to the hit symbol random number loaded in step B302 is set (step B312), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (step B313). ), the stop symbol number is saved in the universal symbol stop symbol area (step B314). In the present embodiment, two types of symbols (“hit symbol 1” and “hit symbol 2”) are prepared as hit symbols for a universal figure.

In the case of the present embodiment, the probability of hitting at the time of low probability of universal figure is 0/251, the probability of hitting at the time of high probability of universal figure is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is “251”, and the lower probability lower limit judgment value is “251”, and the high probability lower limit determination value is “1”.
Therefore, at the time of low probability of ordinary figure, there is a deviation when the value of the random number per hit is "0" to "250".
Further, at the time of high probability of universal figure, the case where the value of the random number per hit is any of "1" to "250" is a hit, and the case where the value of the random number per hit is "0" is out of range.

After saving the stop symbol number in the general symbol stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
After that, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B316), and the empty area after the shift is set to 0.
It is cleared (step B317), and the number of universal figure reservations is updated by -1 (step B318). That is, with the execution of the universal figure fluctuation display game relating to the oldest universal figure hold number 1, a process of advancing the ranks of the universal figure hold numbers 2 to 4 that have been held after the regular figure hold number 1 one by one. I do. By this process, the values for the number of reserved figures of 2 for public figures in the random number storage area per general figure to the number of reserved figures of 4 for general figures are moved from the number of reserved figures of 1 for general figures in the random number storage area for one figure to 3 for the number of retained figures Will be done.
Then, the value for the figure hold number 4 in the random number storage area per figure is cleared, and the figure hold number is decremented by one.

Then, the variation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3 is set, and the variation time is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B320).
). In the case of this embodiment, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is 200/256.
The probability is set to "500 msec", the probability to 40/256 is set to "1500 msec", and the probability to be 16/256 is set to "3000 msec".
Then, the processing for transitioning to the normal figure changing process (step B321) is performed, and the normal processing for normal figure ends.

[Processing during fluctuations in general]
Next, details of the routine figure changing process (step B9) in the routine figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 23, in the routine figure changing process, first, the process number is set to "2" related to the routine figure displaying process (step B401), and the process number is saved in the routine figure game process number area. (Step B402). After that, the figure display time (display time, for example, 600 msec), which is the display time of the figure change display game on the figure display 52, is saved in the figure game processing timer area (step B403), and the figure change ends. Save the signal related to the test signal output data area (for example, turn off the signal during normal symbol 1 fluctuation) (step B404)
The stop flag indicating that the general/universal figure variation display game is stopped is saved in the general/universal figure variation control flag area (step B405), and the general/universal figure variation processing is ended.

[Processing during normal figure display]
Next, the details of the processing for displaying a general figure (step B10) in the above-described general figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 24, in the normal figure displaying process, first, the hit flag (hit information or deviant information) set in the normal figure normal process is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).
When the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), "0" which is related to the ordinary figure normal process is set as the process number (step B515), and the process number is saved in the ordinary figure game process number area (step B515). B516), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flagging fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the process of displaying the universal figure ends.

On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), the hit process setting table is set (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer corresponding to the universal figure stop symbol information (for example, "0". , Or "5"), and saves them in the control pointer area during the universal figure hit (step B505), and the value of the hit end pointer corresponding to the universal figure stop symbol information (for example, "4", "4"). 7”) and save it in the end pointer area per universal figure (step B506). Then, the universal communication opening time corresponding to the universal pattern stop pattern information (for example, 170
0 ms or 2600 ms) is acquired and saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B507).

Next, "3", which is related to the processing of the universal figure, is set as the processing number (step B508).
, The processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (step B509).
Next, a test signal output of a signal related to the start of hitting the universal figure variation display game (for example, the normal symbol 1 hitting signal is ON) and a signal related to the start of the normal electric actuation (eg, normal electric accessory 1 operating signal ON) The data is saved in the data area (step B510) and a signal for driving (turning on) the universal solenoid is output, so the on data is saved in the ordinary solenoid output data area (step B511).

Next, the information in the Poden count number area that stores the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is cleared (step B512), and the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 during the normal charging fraud monitoring period is stored in Hoden. The information in the fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step B513).
Next, the flag (outside fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the processing for displaying the public figure ends.

[Purpose of medium processing]
Next, the details of the normal figure hitting process (step B11) in the aforementioned general figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 25, in the universal figure hitting process, first, the universal figure hitting control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded universal figure hitting control pointer is not less than the upper limit value. It is determined (step B602).

Then, if the value of the control pointer during normal drawing is not equal to or more than the upper limit value (step B602; N
) Updates the control pointer during normal figure hit by +1 (step B603), performs a normal power operation shift setting process (step B604), and ends the process during hit normal figure.
In addition, when the value of the control pointer in the normal figure is equal to or more than the upper limit value (step B602; Y)
Does not perform the process of updating the control pointer during normal operation by +1 in step B603,
The ordinary electric power operation shift setting process (step B604) is performed, and the ordinary figure hitting process is ended.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S114) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the external information edit processing, payout command transmission processing (step S105)
, Winning hole switch/state monitoring process (step S108), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S)
112), based on the monitoring result in the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113), information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement center internal management device or a test shooting test device is created and set in an output buffer. Perform processing, etc.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, in the external information editing process, first, it is determined whether a switch abnormality is occurring (step S801).
When it is determined in step S801 that no switch abnormality is occurring (step S801)
; N), OFF data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S802), and the process proceeds to step S804.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that a switch abnormality is occurring (step S801).
801; Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S803), and the process proceeds to step S804.

Next, when the glass frame opening error is not occurring (step S804; N) and the main body frame opening error is not occurring (step S805; N), the OFF data of the door/frame opening signal is set in the external information output data area. Save (step S806), save the off-data of the security signal in the external information output data area (step S807), and step S810.
Process shifts to.
On the other hand, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (step S804; Y), or
When the main body frame opening error is occurring (step S805; Y), the ON data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S808), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is stored. The data is saved in the test signal output data area (step S809), and the process proceeds to step S810.

Then, the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch is set to "0".
If not, -1 is updated (step S810). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when the RAM is started by the RAM clear in the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S811).
When the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S811; N), that is, when the time has not expired, the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S812) and step S813. Process shifts to. Also,
When the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S811; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the process proceeds to step S813 without performing the process of step S812. ..

Then, when the magnet fraud is occurring (step S813; Y), when the board electric wave fraud is occurring (step S814; Y), when the special winning opening fraud is occurring (step S8).
15; Y), when the illegality is occurring (step S816; Y), or when the starting opening error is occurring (step S817; Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is tested. The data is saved in the signal output data area (step S819), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S820), and step S82.
The process shifts to 1. If frame radio wave irregularity is occurring (step S818; Y), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area without performing the process of step S819 (step S820), and step S821. Process shifts to.

On the other hand, neither the magnet fraud has occurred (step S813; N), the board radio wave fraud has not occurred (step S814; N), or the special winning opening fraud has not occurred (step S815; N).
), whether or not there is an irregularity in general electric power generation (step S816; N), neither an occurrence of a start opening error (step S817; N), nor an occurrence of frame radio wave irregularity (step S818; N).
), the process of step S819 and step S820 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step S821.

Then, a main prize ball signal editing process (step S821) for setting information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a starting opening signal editing process for editing the winning signal of the starting opening (step S822).
)I do.
Next, if the symbol fixed number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not "0", -1 is updated (step S823). The minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol determination number control timer is "0" (step S824).

If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is "0" (step S824; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the OFF data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area. Then (step S825), the external information editing process ends.
If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step S824; N), that is, if the time has not expired, save the ON data of the symbol determination frequency signal in the external information output data area (step (S826), the external information editing process ends.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the performance control device 300 performs a main process shown in FIG. 28 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 28, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3) and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Then, the generation of display data is permitted (step C
5) A random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7 is performed, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) of creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The reading of the input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed in the timer interrupt process, and in the effect button input process, when the input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed, the effect contents are changed.

Then, the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal is set, and the LED by the player is set.
Hall/player setting mode processing for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the liquid crystal and the volume is performed (step C10). Next, a random number updating process (step C11) for updating the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, a received command check process (step C12) that analyzes and responds to the command from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display edit process (step C13) that performs settings for controlling the progress of the effect and edits of drawing commands. ) To set the end of preparation of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (about 33.3 ms) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, since a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds) is created, a V blank interrupt (1/6)
If 0 seconds is entered twice, it is determined that it is the frame switching timing. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate, and for example, the image may be updated (frame switching) at 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frame switching at a timing later than 1/60 seconds). May be switched). When it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) for controlling output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and LED control for the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, the sub information display device 90, and the like. The decoration control process (step C18) to be performed and the movable body control process (step C19) to control the motor and the solenoid of the board effect device 44 are performed,
The process returns to the process of clearing WDT (step C8).

[Reception command check processing]
FIG. 29 shows the received command check processing in the main processing described above. In this reception command check processing, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) is loaded as the command reception number (
(Step C201), it is determined whether the number of received commands is not 0 (Step C202).
.. Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check processing ends. When it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Then, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204
), the command read index is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not the copying of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C206).
As described above, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer,
The contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis operation is performed in the command area. As a result, the command (data) is prepared in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command.
Can be moved to make room. In addition, the command analysis can be collectively performed in one round of the main processing.

When it is determined in step C206 that the copying of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. Further, when it is determined that the copying of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and received command analysis processing (step C208) is performed.

Then, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N),
It returns to the process of step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing is ended. As described above, in the received command check processing, the commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are analyzed together. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Reception command analysis processing]
FIG. 30 shows the received command analysis process in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis processing, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). MODE and A
When it is determined that the CT is within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y)
, It is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C23).
4).

When it is determined in step C232 or step C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C232; C2
34; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

When it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (
In step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a special figure. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235)
;; Y), the variable system command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variable system command (
In Step C235; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the big hit system command (Step C237). The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit mid-stage effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) or a command related to small win mid-range effect (display of a fanfare screen or an end screen). And MO
When it is determined that the DE is within the range of the big hit system command (step C237; Y), the big hit system command process (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

When it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the big hit type command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol type command (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information related to the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special symbol). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol type command (step C239; Y), the symbol type command process (
Step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of the symbol-based command (
In step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of a single-shot system command such as a hold number command or an error command (step C241). The single-shot command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense by combination such as a symbol command and a variable command. This one-shot system command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information system command, an error/illegal system command, and a model designation command. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot type command (step C24
1; Y), the single-shot system command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of the single-shot command ((
In step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the prefetching symbol type command (step C243). When MODE is determined to be in the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; Y), the prefetch symbol system command process (step C2)
44) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

When it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetching symbol type command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetching variable type command (step C245). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variable system command (step C245; Y), the prefetch variable system command process (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended. Also, in step C245,
When it is determined that the MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation type command (step C245; N)
Ends the received command analysis processing.

The look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The pre-reading effect (also referred to as the pre-reading notice or the pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure variability display game corresponding to the starting memory (holding) in which the special figure variability display game is not executed becomes a big hit when it is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance (or what kind of variation pattern) with a predetermined reliability, the decoration special figure starting memory display or the like displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a manner different from the normal mode, or the display device 41. It is an effect such as performing an effect display. Then, the pre-reading system commands (pre-reading variable system command and pre-reading pattern system command) is a command that gives advance notice of the variation pattern and the stop pattern corresponding to the starting memory that is the target of pre-reading effect, and from the game control device 100 at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted to the performance control device 300. Note that normal variable-type commands and symbol-type commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variable display.

[Read-ahead command processing]
FIG. 31 shows the look-ahead symbol system command processing (step C244) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing. In this prefetching symbol type command processing, first, it is determined whether the latest hold information is special figure 1 hold (step C301). If the latest hold information is special figure 1 hold (step C301; Y), that is, if the received read-ahead symbol system command is related to special figure 1 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 1 hold number. Save in the prefetch symbol command area in FIG. 1 (step C302), set the prefetch variable command reception waiting flag (step C304), and finish the prefetch symbol system command processing.

If the latest hold information is not the special figure 1 hold (step C301; N), that is,
If the received pre-reading pattern command is related to special figure 2 hold, save the command in the special figure 2 pre-reading symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure 2 holding (step C303), the pre-reading variable command reception waiting flag It sets (step C304), and ends the prefetching symbol type command processing. The read-ahead variable command reception wait flag is set in step C304 because the read-ahead symbol command and the read-ahead variable command (read-ahead change pattern command) are set (pair).

[Prefetch variable system command processing]
FIG. 32 shows the look-ahead variable system command processing (step C246) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this prefetching variable command processing, it is first determined whether or not the prefetching variable command is waiting to be received (step C311). Here, if there is a read-ahead variable command reception waiting flag set in the above-described read-ahead symbol system command processing, it is determined that the reception is waiting. If the prefetching variable command reception is not waiting (step C311)
; N) ends the prefetching variable system command processing. On the other hand, when the pre-reading variable command reception is waiting (step C311; Y), the pre-reading variable command reception waiting flag is cleared (step C312).

After that, in the processes of steps C313 to C316, a process of converting the look-ahead change command (look-ahead change pattern command) received from the game control device 100 to be convenient for the process in the effect control device 300 is performed. First, a process (step C313) of setting the look-ahead variable MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of symbols held in the latest hold information is performed, and the special memory type information of the starting memory corresponding to the read-ahead variable system command received this time and the relevant information A MODE conversion table for converting the MODE is set according to the current number of reserved special types.

Next, by referring to the set MODE conversion table, the in-sub prefetch change command MODE corresponding to the MODE of the prefetch change command is acquired (step C314). further,
The look-ahead variable ACT conversion table is set (step C315), and the in-sub-look-ahead conversion command ACT corresponding to the ACT of the look-ahead variable command is acquired (step C316).

The MODE includes the information on the first-half fluctuation, but the content and time of the first-half fluctuation set based on this MODE changes depending on the number of holdings at the time of judgment, so the judgment at the time of preliminary judgment and the special figure fluctuation display game start The judgment result may be different depending on the time judgment. Therefore, in order to make it possible to easily and surely perform the prefetching notice effect processing without being affected by the number of holdings at the time of determination, the MODE is converted in the conversion mode according to the current number of holdings, and It is designed so that they can be handled commonly regardless of the number of holds. For example, without reach, it may be a short fluctuation period with a short first half fluctuation time depending on the holding situation, or without reach it may be a long fluctuation period with a long fluctuation period regardless of the holding situation. The look-ahead notice effects are converted into MODEs classified according to the matters to be considered so that the look-ahead notice effects can be processed easily and surely.

Further, the ACT includes information on the latter half fluctuations such as the presence or absence of reach and the type of reach.
The contents of the latter half fluctuation set based on this ACT do not change depending on the number of holdings at the time of determination. However, even in the normal reach, for example, the final stop symbol is set such that the final stop symbol is one frame before the reach symbol, the one symbol frame is the last symbol, and the hit symbol is set.
There are various modes even for the same type of reach, and since the ACT corresponding to each of them is set, the range of values is wide. Therefore, by converting the ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system into the same ACTs, the number is reduced to reduce the processing load such as checking in the processing of the prefetching notice effect.

Next, it is determined whether both MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C31).
7). When both MODE and ACT after conversion are not 0 (step C317; N),
Since this is an abnormal command value, the prefetch variable system command processing is terminated. On the other hand, the converted MO
If both DE and ACT are other than 0 (step C317; Y), the converted command is saved in the prefetch variable command area corresponding to the latest pending information and the pending number (step C318).
), the prefetch command consistency check process (step C319) for determining whether the combination of MODE and ACT (command combination) is normal.

As a result of the prefetch command consistency check process (step C319), if the command combination is not normal (step C320; N), the prefetch variable system command process is ended. on the other hand,
If the command combination is normal (step C320; Y), the prefetch lottery process (step C321) for randomly selecting the execution of the prefetch notice effect is performed, and it is determined whether the prefetch notice effect is generated (step C322).

Then, when the prefetching notice effect is not generated (step C322; N), the prefetching variable system command processing is ended. On the other hand, when the prefetching notice effect is generated (step C322; Y
) Determines whether or not the generated pre-reading notice production (that is, the pre-reading notice production selected in the pre-reading lottery process (step C321)) is a production to be started immediately (step C3).
23). The effect to be started immediately is, for example, a notice of pending change for changing the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed on the display device 41 from the present time. In addition, an effect that does not start immediately is a look-ahead notice effect that is performed during execution of the special figure variation display game, and an effect that continuously generates a specific effect or reach state over a plurality of special figure variation display games, or a variation. The effect is to give an advance notice by the character appearing during the display, the advance change advance notice for changing the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display at a timing later than the current time, and the like. As for the timing of starting the execution of the effect which is not started immediately, if the special figure variation display game is being executed, the special figure variation display game is ended and the execution of the next special figure variation display game is started. The timing and the like are applicable.

If the effect does not start immediately (step C323; N), the prefetching variable system command processing ends. In this case, the advance notice is set at the start of the special figure variation display game that executes the prefetch advance notice effect. On the other hand, if the effect is to start immediately (step C323; Y), the display corresponding to the selected look-ahead notice effect is set (step C324), and the look-ahead variable system command processing ends.

[Variable command processing]
In FIG. 33, the variable command processing (step C2) in the received command analysis processing described above is performed.
36). In this variable system command processing, it is first determined whether the special figure classification is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the type of the special figure is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the symbol system command processing described above.

When this special map type is not determined (step C361; Y), the variable system command processing is ended. Also, if the special figure type is not undetermined (step C361; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (
(Step C362), it is determined whether or not the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (Step C
363).

If the variable command and the symbol type are not compatible (step C363; Y), the variable command processing is ended. If the variable command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C3
63; N) determines the fluctuation pattern type from the fluctuation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, outlying symbols, 16R probability variation A jackpot symbols, 16R probability variation B jackpot symbols, 16R normal A jackpot symbols, 16R normal B jackpot symbols, 4R probability variation jackpot symbols, small. There is a hit pattern. When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, the production is performed as if the variation command (variation pattern command) of the outlier is received, but the symbol command of the 16R probability variation A jackpot symbol is received. It means that it is a combination (combination of variable command and symbol type) that conflicts above.

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure is determined according to the received command. Then, a variation effect setting process for setting information for performing an effect according to the variation command is performed (step C365).

Next, the special figure changing state is set as the P machine state (state of the pachinko machine) (step C366).
). Here, the state of changing the special map indicates that the special map is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, or a fanfare). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (the number of pre-reading executions) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by -1 (a process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable system command process ends.

[Variation effect setting process]
FIG. 34 shows the variation effect setting process (step C365) in the above-described variation system command process.
)showed that. In this variation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern type is variation without reach (step C381). When the fluctuation pattern type is fluctuation without reach (
A step C381; Y) sets the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special map type, and the effect mode at that time (step C382). Since there is no reach variation, the symbol type is always an outlier symbol, and it is not necessary to specifically refer to the symbol type here. The effect mode corresponds to the game mode managed by the effect control device 300 and naturally varies depending on the model, but here, there are a normal mode, a probability variation mode, a time saving mode, a latent mode, and the like. Further, within each mode, a plurality of modes are provided in which the distribution ratio of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41 are different.

Next, referring to the first-half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of MODE and special figure types to be reserved is acquired (step C383).
.. With this, in the case of a change without reach, it is possible to change the lottery content of the notice effect that appears during each change (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) according to the number of holdings. After that, the first-half notice distribution group table is used to perform a lottery for the notice that appears during the first-half change (step C386).

On the other hand, when the variation pattern type is not reachless variation (step C381; N), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first-half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the variation pattern type is acquired (step C385), and the first-half notice distribution group table is used to change the first-half notice. The preliminary announcement lottery that appears in (Step C386) is performed.

Next, the notice production of the second half change is drawn. The latter half of the special figure variation display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a variation display in a special result mode (a combination of special symbols) in which the display area excluding the specific area among the display areas of a plurality of columns of the special figure becomes a big hit. Is stopped and is variably displayed only in a specific area). On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is a fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

First, the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode and symbol type is set (step C387). The latter half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting an address of the latter half notice distribution group table.
Then, the address of the latter-half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired by referring to the latter-half notice distribution group address table (step C388), and the second-half notice distribution group table is used to change the latter half (during reach). A lottery for advance notice will be made (step C389).
).

After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to MODE and ACT is determined (step C390),
The content of the effect corresponding to the preliminary announcement lottery result is determined (step C391). As a result, effects such as the variation time of the decorative special figure variation display game and the main contents of the reach, a notice, and a running memory display unit 8 are displayed.
The display mode of No. 4 will be determined.

Next, a stop symbol setting process for determining a stop symbol is performed by also referring to the determined variation pattern (reach effect, etc.) of the special figure variation display game and the notice contents (step C392). Next, the display setting of the variable effect is set (step C393), and the display setting of the notice effect is set (step C).
394). By these processes, the effect and advance notice in the decorative special figure variable display game set as described above can be executed. After that, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special map type is set (
Step C395). In this process, the setting of decreasing the decorative special figure starting memory display is made in response to the decrease in starting memory corresponding to the start of the special figure changing display game.

Then, a sound number, which is a BGM number, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp or the like, are set (step C396), and a decoration special figure variation (variation display of identification information) corresponding to the special figure type is set. Display settings are made (step C397). Further, in the sub information display device 90, in order to set the variable display of the fourth symbol for displaying the decorative special figure variable display game separately from the variable display of the identification information, the display of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type Make settings (Step C3
98) and ends the variable effect setting process.

35 and 36 show part of the contents of the fluctuation group table and the fluctuation pattern selection table in this embodiment. The game control device 100 uses the variation group table and the variation pattern selection table as the variation pattern table when determining the variation pattern (variation mode).
FIG. 35 shows a part of the contents of the fluctuation group table and the fluctuation pattern selection table when the result is a big hit.
FIG. 35A shows a variation group table in the case where the effect mode is the normal effect mode, that is, in the “normal probability state” and the “non-time saving state”.

The variation groups (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by this variation group table are: normal reach system, SP0 reach system, SP1 reach system, SP2 reach system, S
There are a P3 reach system and a full rotation reach system, and assigned values are set for each.
The fluctuation group is selected by the selected fluctuation group table and fluctuation pattern random number 1. The variation pattern random number 1 takes a value of 0 to 65535, and for example, 2008 values are assigned to the normal reach system when the result is 16R probability variation A big hit. That is, when the result is 16R probability variation A big hit, the normal reach type variation group is selected with a probability of 2008/65536.

FIG. 35B shows the contents of the normal reach type variation pattern selection table used when the normal reach type variation group is selected in the variation group table of FIG. 35A.
The variation patterns selectable by this variation pattern selection table include three variation patterns with variation pattern numbers 77 to 79, which are all normal reach, and the respective distribution values are set.
The fluctuation pattern is selected by the selected fluctuation pattern selection table and the fluctuation pattern random number 2. The variation pattern random number 2 has a value of 0 to 255, and for example, 216 values are assigned to the variation pattern number 77. That is, the variation pattern of variation pattern number 77 is selected with a probability of 216/256.

FIG. 36 shows a part of the contents of the fluctuation group table and the fluctuation pattern selection table when the result is a failure.
FIG. 36A shows a variation group table in the case where the effect mode is the normal effect mode, that is, in the “normal probability state” and the “non-time saving state”.
The variation groups (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by this variation group table include normal variation (no reach) 1 system, normal variation (no reach) 2 system, normal reach system, SP0 reach system, SP2 reach system, SP3 reach system. There is a system.

FIG. 36B shows a normal variation (without reach) 1-system variation pattern selection table used when a variation group of normal variation (without reach) 1-system is selected in the variation group table of FIG. 36(a). The contents of
The variation patterns selectable by this variation pattern selection table include three variation patterns with variation pattern numbers 2 to 4 which are all reachless. When the sum of the number of holdings (number of starting memories) of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0 to 2 and 3, the variation pattern of variation pattern number 2 (variation pattern of ultra-shortening variation with the shortest variation time) ) Is not selected, and when the total number of holdings of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 4 to 6 and 7 to 8, the variation pattern of variation pattern number 2 (variation time is the most It is possible to select a short ultra short fluctuation pattern). Further, when the total number of reserved numbers of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 7 to 8, the variation pattern of variation pattern number 2 (variation pattern of ultra-shortened variation with the shortest variation time) is most easily selected. There is. For example, the case where the sum of the numbers of reservations in the special maps 1 and 2 is 0 is a case where the prize is won in a state where the total number of reservations is 0 (for example, waiting for customers).

<Premonition production>
The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is capable of executing a precursor effect using the board effect device 44 and the display device 41. This precursor effect is a kind of pre-reading notice effect that suggests a pre-reading result, and is started and ended during the variable display of one special figure variable display game. In the present embodiment, as a precursor effect, the movable accessory 44a of the board effect device 44 is operated, and the effect of switching the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41 is interlocked with the operation. To execute.
FIG. 37 shows an example of a timing chart when executing the precursor effect. 38 and 39 show an example of the operation of the movable accessory 44a and the display of the display device 41 at that time.

As shown in [A] of FIG. 38, a decorative special figure variable display game display section 41a for displaying the decorative special figure variable display game is provided in the center of the display area of the display device 41. In the decorative special figure variation display game display section 41a, the decorative special symbol variation display game is executed by variably displaying the decorative special symbol (identification information) in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas and then stopping the display.
Further, below the display area of the display device 41, a standby holding display section 41b for displaying a decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the undigested starting memory is provided. The decorative special figure start-up memory display displayed on the standby hold display section 41b corresponds to the start-up storage one-to-one and is arranged in the order of storage. The decoration special figure starting memory display at the left end is the decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the first stored starting memory (first starting memory or second starting memory), and shifts to the left (shift) each time it is consumed. ). Further, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure variation display game based on each starting memory and the look-ahead result such as the variation pattern by the display mode of the corresponding decorative special figure starting memory display.

On the left side of the standby hold display section 41b, there is provided a running hold display section 41c for displaying information on the start memory during exhaustion (start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed).
At the start of the special figure variation display game, the decorative special figure starting memory display at the left end of the standby pending display section 41b is shifted (shifted) to the running pending display section 41c. Further, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure variation display game being executed, the variation pattern, and the like by the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display displayed in the in-progress pending display section 41c.

Further, in the corner of the display area of the display device 41 (for example, the upper left corner), a small symbol that is relatively smaller than the decorative special symbol (identification symbol) that is variably displayed on the decorative special symbol variable display game display section 41a. A variable display portion 41d for small symbols for variably displaying is provided.
In addition, in a corner portion (for example, an upper right corner portion) of the display area of the display device 41, a number holding display portion 41e that displays the number of undigested starting memories by numbers is provided. Note that the number reservation display unit 41e may display the total number of undigested first starting memories and undigested second starting memories, as shown in FIG. 38, FIG. As shown in FIG. 65, the number of undigested first starting memories and the number of undigested second starting memories may be separately displayed.

Further, as shown in [A] of FIG. 38, the board effect device 44 includes a movable accessory 44a having a shape imitating a teammate character having a spear. The movable accessory 44a is, for example, the display device 4
It is possible to move up and down between the display area of No. 1 and a position where it does not overlap with the front and rear, and a position where it overlaps with each other, and further, it is possible to move left and right without overlapping with the display area of the display device 41 in the front and back,
The display device 41 is configured to be movable left and right in a state of overlapping with the display area of the display device 41 in the front-rear direction.
Here, the position where the display area of the display device 41 does not overlap with the front and rear (the state where it does not overlap) is a position where most (for example, half or more) of the movable accessory 44a does not overlap the display area with the front and rear (a state where it does not overlap). is there. Further, the position (overlapping state) overlapping the display region of the display device 41 in the front-rear direction is a position (overlapping state) in which most (for example, half or more) of the movable accessory 44a overlaps the display region in the front-rear direction.

In the present embodiment, as a sign effect, a movable accessory is displayed on a specific decorative special figure starting memory display (hereinafter referred to as "specific pending display") of the decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the standby holding display section 41b. 44a is actuated, and an effect of whether or not the display mode of the specific hold display is changed to the suggestion mode by the action of the movable accessory 44a on the specific hold display is executed.
Here, by displaying the decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the standby holding display section 41b in a suggesting manner, the result of the special figure changing display game based on the corresponding starting memory and the look-ahead result such as the changing pattern are suggested. can do. Further, by displaying the decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the execution pending display section 41c in a suggestion mode, it is possible to suggest the result or variation pattern of the special figure variation display game being executed.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the specific hold display is changed to a display mode imitating an enemy character at a predetermined timing (in the case of the present embodiment, the start of the precursor effect), and then the specific hold display is performed. The movable accessory 44a is acted on the display (in the present embodiment, the spear is pierced), but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the display mode of the specific hold display does not have to change to a display mode imitating an enemy character.

As shown in FIG. 37, when the variation display of the special figure variation display game is started, the effect control device 300 starts the hold shift effect in which the decorative special figure starting memory display is shifted to the adjacent side (t11). Specifically, as shown in [A] of FIG. 38, the special figure variation display game ends, and [A] of FIG. 38.
As shown in, when the next special figure variation display game starts, the decoration special figure starting memory display shifts to the left.
Next, as shown in FIG. 37, in the case where the special map variation display game this time is the special figure variation display game that has been won in the lottery of the omen effect, the effect control device 300 indicates the end of the hold shift production. The effect is started (t12).
The sign effect lottery is a lottery for deciding whether or not to execute the sign effect, and when the lottery for the sign effect is won, the sign effect is executed during the variable display of the winning special figure variation display game. It The lottery for the indication effect is performed, for example, in the advance notice lottery (step C386 or step C389) of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 34).

When the indication effect starts, first, as shown in [C] of FIG. 38, the display mode of the specific hold display changes from the normal display mode to the display mode imitating an enemy character, and the movable accessory 4 is displayed.
Position where 4a overlaps with the display area from the initial position (first position) that does not overlap with the front and rear (second position)
Move to.
Next, as shown in [D] of FIG. 39, in a state where the movable accessory 44a overlaps the front and rear of the display area (that is, in front of the display area), from the second position, the tip of the spear is in front of and behind the specific reserved display. To the working position (third position) where the movable accessory 44a can act on the specific reserved display. It should be noted that the movable accessory 44a may be capable of swinging down the spear, and in that case, when the movable spear 44a reaches the operating position, the spear is swung down and the tip of the spear is moved. You may comprise so that it may overlap with a specific hold display before and behind.

Next, the specific hold display is a decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory selected in the lottery of the standby hold change effect (effect that changes the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display and suggests the look-ahead result). In this case, as shown in [e] of FIG. 39, the display mode of the specific hold display is changed from the display mode imitating the enemy character to the suggestion mode, and the indication effect ends. On the other hand, when the specific hold display is the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory that is selected in the lottery of the standby hold change effect, the display mode of the particular hold display does not change to the suggestion mode (that is, , The indication effect ends, while the display mode imitating the enemy character is maintained or the display mode imitating the enemy character is returned to the normal display mode).
The waiting hold change effect lottery is a lottery for deciding whether or not to execute the waiting hold change effect. When the lottery for the standby hold change effect is won, the decoration special drawing start corresponding to the winning start memory The display mode of the memory display changes to the suggestion mode at a predetermined timing. The lottery for the standby pending change effect is performed, for example, in the prefetch lottery process (step C321) of the prefetch variable system command process (FIG. 32).

Next, as shown in FIG. 37, when the precursor effect is finished, the effect control device 300 starts an accessory return effect in which the movable accessory 44a returns to the initial position (first position) (t13). In particular,
As shown in [F] in FIG. 39, the movable accessory 44a moves from the acting position (third position) overlapping the display area to the front and rear to the non-overlapping position (fourth position). Next, the movable accessory 44a moves from the fourth position to the initial position (first position) without overlapping the front and rear of the display area.

In this way, the indication effect is executed during the variable display of the special figure variable display game. Therefore, if the execution time of the aura effect is longer than the variation time of the special figure variation display game, the end timing of the aura effect is later than the variation end timing of the special figure variation display game. Then, there arises such a disadvantage that the effect to be executed after the end of the variation cannot be executed as planned. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, when the variation time of the special figure variation display game won in the lottery of the indication effect is shorter than the execution time of the indication effect, the control for canceling the execution of the indication effect or the indication The control was performed to end the production on the way. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent inconveniences such as the effect that is scheduled to be executed after the end of the variation not being executed as scheduled even if such control is not performed, the execution time of the precursor effect is changed to Shorter than the variation time of the special figure variation display game.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, the execution time of the precursor effect (t12 to t13).
) Is made shorter than the variation time (t11 to t14) of the special figure variation display game started when the total of the numbers of holdings of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is the upper limit number. Although there are various fluctuation times of the special figure fluctuation display game, the special figure fluctuation display game that can be won in the lottery of the precursor effect has the shortest fluctuation time. The special figure variation display game that is executed in the normal effect mode without the special figure is started when the total number of reserved numbers of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is the upper limit number (8 in this embodiment). This is a variable display game (see FIG. 36(b)).
.. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the special effect variation display game is performed in the normal effect mode without the result of the predictive effect execution time value and the variation pattern is reach. The special figure variation display game (hereinafter referred to as “hold MAX
Fluctuation. Set smaller than the fluctuation time value of ). As a result, the end timing of the precursor effect is changed in the special figure variation display game regardless of the number of unsatisfied starting memories (the total of the numbers held in special figure 1 and special figure 2) when starting the special figure variation display game. It comes before the end timing. That is, the precursor effect can be executed (executed from the beginning to the end) in any special figure variation display game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special figure variation display game starts, the hold shift effect in which the decorative special figure starting memory display is shifted to the adjacent side starts, and when the hold shift effect ends, the precursor effect starts. That is, in the present embodiment, the execution of the precursor effect is prohibited during the hold shift effect, and the predictive effect starts later than the start of the change. Accordingly, even if the execution time of the precursor effect is shorter than the fluctuation time of the hold MAX variation, the end timing of the precursor effect may vary depending on the length of the execution time of the precursor effect and the start timing of the precursor effect. It may be later than the change end timing of.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the predictive effect is started after the hold shift effect, the end timing of the predictive effect is set to be earlier than the change end timing of the special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG.
As shown in, the time from the start of the hold shift effect to the end of the precursor effect (t11 to t13)
Is made shorter than the fluctuation time (t11 to t14) of the pending MAX fluctuation. That is, the sum of the execution time value of the hold shift effect and the execution time value of the precursor effect is set to be smaller than the fluctuation time value of the fluctuation of the hold MAX.
Note that the sum of the execution time value of the hold shift effect and the execution time value of the precursor effect may be set to be the same as the change time value of the hold MAX change, but the result mode of the decorative special figure change display game is the movable combination. From the viewpoint of avoiding inconvenience such as difficulty in seeing the object 44a, it is preferable that the movable accessory 44a does not overlap with the display area of the display device 41 at the end of the variable display of the special figure variable display game. In addition, from the viewpoint of avoiding inconveniences such as it is difficult to understand that the result mode of the decorative special figure variable display game is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the specific hold display is changed when the variable display of the special figure variable display game is finished. The switching (change) is preferably completed.

Further, when the precursor effect is finished, the accessory return effect in which the movable accessory 44a returns to the initial position (first position) is started. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, the character return production is finished after the timing (t15) at which the next special figure variation display game starts.
It is possible to set the timing at which the character return production ends to be the same as the timing at which the next special map variation display game starts, or before the timing at which the next special figure variation display game starts. By setting the timing at which the character effect production is finished after the timing at which the next special figure variation display game starts, it is possible to sufficiently secure the execution time of the precursor production.

The precursor effect is not limited to that using the board effect device 44 and the display device 41, and can be changed as appropriate, and the frame decoration device 18, the speakers 19a and 19b, the display device 41, the sub display device 42, the board effect device. It is sufficient that at least one of 44, the board decoration device 46 and the like is used.
For example, instead of the movable accessory 44a of the board effect device 44, a character image G1 of a teammate character holding a spear may be displayed on the display device 41, and the character image G1 may be caused to act as the specific pending display. An example thereof is shown in FIG.

When the aura effect is started, first, as shown in [C] of FIG. 40, the character image G1 appears in the display area of the display device 41. Next, as shown in [C] of FIG. 40, the character image G1 moves to a position (action position) where the specific hold display can be applied. Next, when the specific hold display is a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory that is won in the lottery of the standby hold change effect, as shown in [S] of FIG. 40, the display of the particular hold display is displayed. The mode changes to the suggested mode, and the indication effect ends. On the other hand, when the specific hold display is a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory that is lost in the lottery of the standby hold change effect, the display mode of the particular hold display does not change to the suggestion mode, and The production ends. Then, when the precursor effect is finished, a character exit effect (an effect equivalent to a character return effect) in which the character image G1 exits from the action position is started. As a result, the character image G1 disappears from the display area.

The timing of starting the display of the character image G1 can be changed as appropriate, and for example, the character image G1 may appear before the start of the precursor effect.
Further, from the viewpoint of avoiding the inconvenience that it is difficult to understand that the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is stopped and displayed, the character image G1 is also stopped and displayed during the stop display of the special figure variation display game. Preferably. Therefore, it is preferable that the character exit effect is started after the stop display of the special figure variation display game is finished (for example, when the next special figure variation display game is started).

The character image displayed on the display device 41 in place of the movable accessory 44a of the board effect device 44 is not limited to the character image G1 of the teammate character holding the spear, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the way of moving the character image G1 can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the shape of the movable accessory 44a is not limited to the shape imitating a teammate character holding a spear, and can be appropriately changed. Further, the moving manner of the movable accessory 44a can be appropriately changed.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 41A, a cover member 40a may be provided in front of the movable accessory 44a which does not overlap the front and rear of the display area of the display device 41. In this case, for example, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 41(a), when the movable accessory 44a is in a state where the display area of the display device 41 does not overlap with the front and rear, the entire movable accessory 44a (or (More than half) is hidden by the cover member 44a and becomes invisible (difficult to see). On the other hand, for example, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 41( a ), when the movable accessory 44 a is in a state of overlapping with the display area of the display device 41 in the front and rear, all (or more than half) of the movable accessory 44 a. However, it is visible without being hidden by the cover member 44a.

When a plurality of precursor effects having different execution time values can be executed, all the execution time values of the plurality of precursor effects may be set to be smaller than the fluctuation time value of the pending MAX fluctuation, Only some of the execution time values of the plurality of precursor effects may be set to be smaller than the fluctuation time value of the hold MAX fluctuation.
FIG. 41B shows an example of setting only a part of the execution time values of the plurality of precursor effects to be smaller than the fluctuation time value of the hold MAX fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 41(b), it is possible to execute a precursor effect A having an execution time of 2 seconds, a predictive effect B having an execution time of 3 seconds, and a predictive effect C having an execution time of 8 seconds. The predictive effect whose execution time value is smaller than the fluctuation time value of the special figure fluctuation display game won in the lottery is executed. That is, when the special figure variation display game won in the lottery of the aura effect is the ultra-shortened variation (variation time of 4 seconds) or the shortened variation (a variation time of 8 seconds) shown in FIG. The predictive effect selected from A and the predictive effect B is executed during the variable display of the special effect variable display game, and the special effect variable display game won in the lottery of the predictive effect causes the normal effect shown in FIG. (Variation time 13.
6 seconds) or the like, the predictive effect selected from the predictive effect A, the predictive effect B, and the predictive effect C may be executed during the variable display of the special figure variable display game.

Of course, in this case as well, the precursor effect is set so that the sum of the execution time value of the hold shift effect and the execution time value of the predictive effect is smaller than the fluctuation time value of the special figure variation display game won in the lottery of the predictive effect. It is also possible to select.
In addition, when the special figure variation display game which is won in the lottery of the indication effect is the MAX hold variation, the indication effect having the shortest execution time may be executed. That is, FIG. 41(b)
In the example shown in (1), when the special figure variation display game that is won in the lottery of the aura effect is an ultra-shortening variation of the variation time of 4 seconds (hold MAX variation in the present embodiment), only the aura effect A can be selected. The indication effect B and the indication effect C may not be selected.

Further, when the predictive effect is continuously executed over a plurality of special figure variation display games, all execution time values of the plurality of predictive effect that are continuously executed are smaller than the variable time value of the hold MAX fluctuation. It may be set, or only some of the execution time values of the plurality of precursor effects continuously executed may be set to be smaller than the fluctuation time value of the pending MAX fluctuation.
In addition, the predictive effect executed for the first time among the plurality of predictive effects that are continuously executed is more likely to be executed during the hold MAX variation than the predictive effect executed for the second time and thereafter.
When setting only a part of the execution time values of the plurality of precursor effects continuously executed to be smaller than the fluctuation time value of the hold MAX variation, the execution time value of the precursor effect executed at least the first time is set to It is preferable to set it smaller than the fluctuation time value of the hold MAX fluctuation.

Further, the effect control device 300 of the present embodiment can execute the decorative special figure variation display game in a pseudo-variation variation mode in which unit variation display in which identification information is variably displayed and then temporarily stopped is performed a plurality of times to derive a result aspect. However, it is reserved M in the fluctuation time value of the unit fluctuation display in the pseudo continuous fluctuation mode.
When there is a value smaller than the fluctuation time value at the time of AX, the execution time value of the precursor effect is set to one of the fluctuation time values of the unit fluctuation display in the pseudo continuous fluctuation mode (for example, the unit fluctuation with the shortest fluctuation time). It is also possible to set it smaller than the display fluctuation time value).

Further, it is also possible to execute the precursor effect in which the execution time is shorter than the temporary stop time (time between the unit fluctuation display and the next unit fluctuation display) in the pseudo continuous fluctuation mode. An example is shown in FIG.
2 shows.
In the decorative special figure variation display game in the pseudo-continuous variation mode, for example, as shown in [T] in FIG. 42, the first unit variation display in the pseudo-continuous variation mode is completed, and is shown in [H] in FIG. As such, among the decorative special symbols (identification information) displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas, the pseudo-relational exclusive pattern that appears only during the pseudo-repetition variation (including the character "ream", for example) Only the (structured pattern) remains, and it is informed that the pseudo-repeating fluctuation is in progress.
As shown in, the second unit fluctuation display starts. In this case, the precursor effect is executed while the fact that the pseudo continuous fluctuation is being notified is given. Specifically, for example, as shown in [H] of FIG. 42, the character image G1 (or the movable accessory 44a or the like) moves to the action position while the fact that the pseudo continuous variation is being reported. .. That is, the character image G1 (or the movable accessory 44a or the like) acts on the specific suspension display while the fact that the pseudo-variation is being changed is informed.
Then, as shown in [T] of FIG. 42, when the second unit variation display is started, the character image G1 (or the movable accessory 44a or the like) is exited from the operating position.

Further, the character image that acts on the specific reserved display may be a character image that constitutes a decorative special symbol. FIG. 43 shows an example of a case where the character image forming the decorative special symbol acts on the specific reserved display in the sign effect in which the execution time is shorter than the temporary stop time in the pseudo continuous variation mode.
For example, as shown in [na] of FIG. 43, the pseudo-relational exclusive pattern is composed of a character image (for example, a character image of “ream”) and a character image (for example, an image simulating an umbrella). And FIG.
As shown in [D], the character image forming the symbol dedicated to the pseudo-relation operates on the specific hold display while the fact that the pseudo-reconnection is being changed is informed. When the specific hold display is a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory selected in the lottery of the standby hold change effect, as shown in [nu] of FIG. The display mode changes to the suggestion mode.
Of course, not only the indication effect executed during the temporary stop time in the pseudo-continuous variation mode (the indication effect whose execution time is shorter than the temporary stop time), but also the indication effect executed during the variation display of the special figure variation display game ( In a sign effect etc. in which the execution time is shorter than the fluctuation time of the hold MAX fluctuation), the character image forming the decorative special symbol may be applied to the specific hold display instead of the movable accessory 44a or the character image G1.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the indication effect, the effect of whether or not the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the standby hold display section 41b is changed to the suggestion mode is performed. Not limited. The precursor effect may be, for example, an effect of whether or not the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the in-execution pending display section 41c changes to the suggestion mode.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and the result of the variable display game is A game machine that generates a special game state in which a player is given a game value when a special result is obtained, and a predetermined random number is extracted based on the satisfaction of a start condition and stored as a start memory for a variable display game. A means (game control device 100) and an effect control unit (effect control device 300) that executes a predetermined notice effect (precursor effect) during execution of the variable display game, and the execution time value of the predetermined notice effect is More than the fluctuation time value of the fluctuation display game (hold MAX fluctuation) which is started when the number of starting memories stored in the starting memory means reaches a predetermined upper limit number (8 in the case of the present embodiment). small.

Therefore, since the execution time of the precursor effect is shorter than the fluctuation time of the hold MAX fluctuation (that is, the special figure fluctuation display game in which the fluctuation time is the shortest), the notice effect (precursor effect) is executed in any fluctuation display game. You can

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) (in the case of the present embodiment, the shift-holding A predetermined notice effect (precursor effect) is started after the effect is finished), and the sum of the execution time value of the predetermined notice effect and the value of the predetermined time (in the present embodiment, the execution time value of the hold shift effect). Is a variable display game (holding MA) which is started in a state where the number of starting memories stored in the starting storage means (game control means 100) has reached a predetermined upper limit number (8 in this embodiment).
It can be configured to be smaller than the fluctuation time value of (X fluctuation).

With this configuration, the indication effect starts later than the start of the special figure variation display game, so that it is possible to provide a period in which the indication effect is not executed while the player has the expectation for the execution of the indication effect. , It becomes possible to enhance the interest of the game.
The precursor effect may be started at the start of the special figure variation display game.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can control the operation of the movable accessory 44a used for the predetermined notice effect (precursor effect), and the predetermined notice effect. After that, it is possible to execute a return effect (effect return effect) for returning the movable accessory 44a to the initial position, and the return effect is performed after the variable display game (special figure variable display game) in which the predetermined notice effect is executed. It can be configured to end during the running of the floating display game that starts.

With this configuration, it is possible to sufficiently secure the execution time of the precursor effect.
It should be noted that the special figure variation display game that is being executed when ending the character effect production is not limited to the special figure variation display game that is executed next to the special figure variation display game in which the precursor effect is executed.
Further, the character effect returning effect may be ended during execution of the special figure variation display game in which the omen effect is executed (including the end of the special figure variation display game in which the omen effect is executed).

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning area is executed, and the variable display game is executed. When the result of is a special result, it is a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that gives a game value to the player, and the starting winning area is a first starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36),
It is provided with a second start winning area (second starting winning opening 97, normal variation winning device 37), and a predetermined random number is extracted based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting winning area and stored as a first starting memory. , A starting storage means (game control device 100) that extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of a game ball into the second starting winning area and stores it as a second starting memory, and a predetermined notice effect during execution of the variable display game ( The effect control means (effect control device 300) for executing (precursor effect) is provided, and for a predetermined notice effect execution time, the sum of the number of first start memories and the number of second start memories is a predetermined upper limit number. (In the case of the present embodiment, the variation display game (hold MAX variation) which is started in the state of reaching 8)
Shorter than the fluctuation time of.

Therefore, since the execution time of the precursor effect is shorter than the fluctuation time of the hold MAX fluctuation (that is, the special figure fluctuation display game in which the fluctuation time is the shortest), the notice effect (precursor effect) is executed in any fluctuation display game. You can

In the present embodiment, both the variation patterns of the first special figure variation display game and the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game take into consideration the total number of holdings (number of starting memories) of special figure 1 and special figure 2. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is selected in consideration of the number of holdings (number of first starting memory) of the special figure 1, and the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is It is also possible to make a selection in consideration of the number of holdings (the number of second starting memories) in FIG. In this case, in the first special figure variation display game which has the shortest variation time among the first special figure variation display games that can be won in the lottery of the indication effect, the number of holding special figures 1 is the upper limit number (for example, 4). It is the first special figure variation display game (hold MAX variation) which is started at the time of the second special figure variation display game which has the shortest variation time in the second special figure variation display game which can be won in the lottery of the precursor effect. Is a second special figure variation display game (hold MAX variation) which is started when the number of pending figures of the special figure 2 is the upper limit number (for example, 4).

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the execution time of the predetermined notice effect (precursor effect) is such that the number of the first starting memories or the number of the second starting memories reaches the predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). It can be configured to be shorter than the variation time of the variation display game (special figure variation display game) which is started in the state of being on.
With this configuration, the execution time of the precursor effect becomes shorter than the change time of the hold MAX fluctuation (that is, the special figure fluctuation display game in which the fluctuation time is the shortest), so that the notice effect in any fluctuation display game ( Sign production) can be executed.

In the present embodiment, the special figure variation display game is executed in the order of winning in the starting winning area, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, one special figure variation display game (for example, the second special figure variation display). The game may be preferentially executed.

<Variations of precursor production>
The sign effect shown in FIGS. 37 to 43 is of a type in which a character image appearing in the display area of the display device 41 (or a movable accessory appearing at a position overlapping with the display area before and after) always moves to the action position. It is a precursor effect (hereinafter referred to as a “first type of precursor effect”). In addition to (or in place of) the first type of aura effect, a type of aura effect that may or may not move the appearing character image (or the appearing movable accessory) to the action position ( It is also possible to configure so as to execute "a second type of indication effect" hereinafter.

In the second type predictive effect, when the lottery for predictive effect is won, the action possibility lottery is performed.
The action availability lottery is a lottery for deciding whether or not to move the character image to the action position. When the lottery for the action availability production is won, the character is displayed during execution of the selected special figure variation display game. The image moves to the working position. That is, when the action availability lottery is won, the character image appears and moves to the action position. On the other hand, when the character is selected in the action possibility lottery, the character image appears but does not move to the action position.

Further, in the second-type predictive effect, after performing the action possibility lottery, the currently-executed pending change effect lottery is performed. In the lottery of the pending change effect during execution, the pending change effect during execution (effect that changes the display mode of the decoration special map starting memory display and suggests the result or fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed) is executed. This is a lottery for deciding whether or not, and when the lottery for the on-hold pending change effect is won, the on-hold pending display section 41c is running during the execution of the winning special figure variation display game.
The display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display (specific hold display in the present modification) displayed in FIG. That is, when the lottery for the on-hold pending change effect is won, the display mode of the specific pending display changes to the suggestive mode. On the other hand, when the lottery for the pending suspension change effect is lost, the display mode of the specific pending display does not change to the suggestion mode.
The actionable/not possible lottery and the lottery of the pending change effect during execution include, for example, the variable effect setting process (FIG. 34).
In advance notice lottery (step C386 or step C389).

An example of the action availability lottery table is shown in FIGS. 44(a) to 44(c).
In the action possibility lottery table, the probability that action is selected (that is, the probability of winning) and no action are selected depending on whether the result of the special figure variation display game to be executed this time is a big hit or the result is off. The probability of being played (that is, the probability of losing) is defined.
For example, in the case where the action availability lottery table shown in FIG. 44(a) is set, if the result of the special figure variation display game to be executed this time is a big hit, there is a 50% chance of winning and the special execution to be executed this time. If the result of the figure variation display game is out of proportion, there is a 60% chance of winning.
Production control device 300 selects one action availability lottery table from a plurality of action availability lottery tables (three types of action availability lottery tables shown in FIGS. 44(a) to (c)) based on the game state, for example. And set.

An example of the pending change change effect lottery table during execution is shown in FIGS.
In the execution pending change effect lottery table, if the action availability lottery is won and the result of the special figure variation display game executed this time is a big hit, and if the action availability lottery is won and the special figure executed this time If the result of the variable display game is out of proportion, it is defeated in the action possibility lottery, and if the result of the special figure variable display game is a big hit, it is defeated in the action possibility lottery, and it is executed this time. The probability that a pending change is selected (that is, the winning probability) and the probability that a pending change is not selected (that is, a losing probability) are defined when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order.

For example, in the case where the execution pending change effect lottery table shown in FIG. 44D is set, when the action availability lottery is won and the result of the special figure variation display game executed this time is a big hit. With a probability of 60%, wins the action possibility lottery, and if the result of the special figure variation display game executed this time is out of proportion, wins with a probability of 70%, loses to the action possibility lottery, and If the result of the special map change display game to be executed this time is a big hit, there is a 5% probability that the player wins the prize and loses to the action possibility lottery, and the result of the special map change display game to be executed this time is out of proportion. Won't win.
In addition, even if any of the four types of pending hold change effect lottery tables shown in FIGS. 44(d) to (g) is set, when the action availability lottery is lost, the current pending change effect lottery is selected. Only when the result of the special figure variation display game executed this time is a big hit, the character image G2 does not act on the specific pending display, while the display mode of the specific pending display changes to the suggestive mode. By doing so, it can be suggested that the jackpot is confirmed.
Production control device 300, for example, based on the game state, one of a plurality of execution pending change effect lottery table (four types of ongoing pending change effect lottery table shown in FIG. 44 (d) ~ (g)). Select and set the pending change effect lottery table during execution.

In addition, in the present modification, as a second-type predictive effect, an effect of whether or not the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the pending execution display section 41c is changed to the suggestive mode is performed.
It is not limited to this. The second type of sign effect may be, for example, an effect of whether or not the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the standby holding display unit 41b changes to the suggestion mode.
Further, in the present modification, the character image G2 of the ally character holding a stick is displayed as the character image that acts on the specific hold display, but the character image displayed on the display device 41 is not limited to this, and may be changed as appropriate. It is possible, and for example, the character image G1 of a teammate character holding a spear may be used. Further, the way of moving the character image G2 can be changed as appropriate.
Further, at a predetermined timing (in the case of this modification, at the start of the precursor effect), the display mode of the specific hold display is changed to a display mode imitating an enemy character, and then the character image G2 is displayed on the specific hold display. Is operated (in the case of this modification, tapped with a stick), but is not limited to this. For example, the display mode of the specific hold display does not have to change to a display mode imitating an enemy character.

FIG. 45 shows an example of the second type predictive effect in the case of winning the predictive effect lottery and also winning the action possibility lottery.
When the precursor effect is started, first, as shown in [C] of FIG. 45, the character image G2 appears in the display area of the display device 41. Next, as shown in [H] of FIG. 45, the character image G2 moves to the action position, and the rod is swung down so that the tip of the character overlaps the specific reserved display.
Next, in the case where the special figure variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game that is won in the lottery for the execution pending change effect, as shown in [F] of FIG. 45, the display mode of the specific pending display is displayed. Changes to the suggestion mode, and the indication effect ends. On the other hand, when the special figure variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game that has been selected in the lottery for the execution pending change effect, as shown in [f] of FIG. 45, the display mode of the specific pending display is displayed. Does not change to the suggestion mode, and the indication effect ends. Then, when the precursor effect is finished, the character image G2 exits from the operating position and disappears from the display area.

In the example shown in FIG. 45, after the character image G2 acts on the specific hold display (after the bar returns to a state where it does not overlap the specific hold display), the display mode of the specific hold display changes to the suggestion mode. However, the timing when the display mode of the specific hold display changes can be changed as appropriate,
For example, the display mode of the specific hold display may change to the suggestion mode while the character image G2 is acting on the specific hold display (when the bar overlaps with the specific hold display).

FIG. 46 shows an example of the second type of precursor effects when the precursor effect lottery is won and the action possibility lottery is lost.
When the aura effect is started, first, as shown in [C] of FIG. 46, the character image G1 appears in the display area of the display device 41. Next, as shown in [Mi] of FIG. 46, the character image G2 disappears from the display area without moving to the action position. Next, when the special figure variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game which is won in the lottery of the execution pending change effect,
As shown in [M] of 6, the display mode of the specific hold display is changed to the suggestion mode, and the precursor effect is finished. On the other hand, when the special figure variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game that has been selected in the lottery for the execution pending change effect, the display mode of the specific pending display is displayed as shown in [M] of FIG. 46. Does not change to the suggestion mode, and the indication effect ends.

The length of the precursor effect execution time when the action possibility lottery is won and the length of the precursor effect execution time when the action possibility lottery is defeated may be the same or different. In the present modification, the length of the execution time of the precursor effect is, for example, the character image G2.
It is the length from the timing to start the display of to the timing to start the display in the suggestion mode of the specific hold display.
Further, when the character is not selected in the action possibility lottery, after the character image G2 disappears from the display area,
Instead of changing the display mode of the specific hold display to the suggestion mode, the display mode of the specific hold display may be changed to the suggestion mode before the character image G2 disappears from the display area. In this case, the timing at which the character image G2 disappears from the display area may be the same or different depending on whether the action availability lottery is won or lost.

Also, during the signage effect, the background special image is darkened (blacked out) in order to make it noticeable that the signage effect is being performed, and it is difficult to visually recognize the decorative special pattern (identification information) that is being displayed in a variable manner. You may let me. The same applies to the first-type predictive presentation.
In addition, as the second type predictive effect, a predictive effect of whether or not the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the execution-in-progress display section 41c changes to the suggestive mode, and the standby hold display section 4
It may be configured to be able to execute both of the indication effect of whether or not the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed in 1b is changed to the suggestion mode. Furthermore, in this case, the pending execution display section 41
The display time of the decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the standby hold display section 41b and the length of the execution time of the precursor effect of whether or not the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on c are changed. The length of the execution time of the precursor effect of whether or not changes may be the same or different. The same applies to the first-type predictive presentation.
The timing of starting the display of the character image G2 can be changed as appropriate, and it is preferable to prohibit the display start of the character image G2 during the hold shift effect in which the decorative special figure starting memory display shifts to the adjacent side. That is, it is preferable that the display of the character image G2 be started before the hold shift effect or after the hold shift effect. The same applies to the first-type predictive presentation.

Further, the number of times the display mode of the specific hold display changes during the sign presentation may be determined based on a predetermined condition. That is, you may perform the number-of-changes lottery which determines the number of times that the display mode of the specific hold display is changed. The same applies to the first-type predictive presentation.
Further, the character image appearing during the sign presentation may be selected from a plurality of types of character images based on a predetermined condition. That is, a character lottery may be performed in which one character image is selected from a plurality of types of character images. The same applies to the first-type predictive presentation.
Further, the number of times the character image (or the movable accessory or the like) acts on the specific hold display during the sign presentation may be determined based on a predetermined condition. That is, the action number lottery may be performed to determine the number of times the character image (or the movable accessory or the like) acts on the specific hold display. First
The same applies to the type of aura production.

Further, the change number lottery, the character lottery, and the action number lottery can be combined and performed. An example thereof is shown in FIG.
As described above, the effect control device 300 performs the action possibility lottery and the on-hold pending change effect lottery in order to determine the effect mode of the second type predictive effect. In addition to these lottery, by performing combination of change number lottery, character lottery, and action number lottery, the number of times the display mode of the specific hold display changes (or selection of the number of changes) depending on the type of the character image that appears. The ratio) and the number of times the character image acts on the specific hold display (or the selection ratio of the number of times the character image acts) can be made different.

In addition to the action availability lottery and the lottery for the execution pending change effect, when performing the combination of the change number lottery, the character lottery, and the action number lottery, for example, when the lottery for the execution pending change effect is won, it is specified. Change number lottery to determine the number of times to change the display mode of the hold display,
Based on the result of the change number lottery, a character lottery is performed in which one character image is selected from a plurality of types of character images, and the character image is specified and displayed on the basis of the result of the change number lottery and the result of the character lottery. The number-of-actions lottery is performed to determine the number of times (for example, the number of times a specific hold display is hit with a stick). In this case, the change number lottery, the character lottery, and the action number lottery are performed, for example, in advance notice lottery (step C386 or step C389) of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 34).

An example of the character lottery table is shown in FIG. 47(a).
In the character lottery table, the probability that the character image A is selected and the character image B when the “holding change once” is selected and the “holding change twice” is selected by the change number drawing The probability of being selected is specified.
Here, "once change of hold" means that the display mode of the specific hold display is changed once, that is, from the normal display mode (for example, blue circle) to the first suggestion mode (for example, green circle). "Twice hold change" means that the display mode of the specific hold display is changed twice, that is, the normal display mode is changed to the first suggestion mode, and then the first hold mode is changed. Is changed from the suggested mode of No. 2 to the second suggested mode (for example, a red circle).

An example of the action number lottery table is shown in FIG. 47(b).
In the number-of-actions lottery table, "character image A" is selected by the character lottery, and "holding change 1 time" is selected by the number-of-changes lottery, and "character image A" is selected by the character lottery. And, "2 changes on hold" by change number lottery
Is selected, “character image B” is selected by the character lottery, and
When "Hold change 1 time" is selected by the change count lottery, and when "Hold change once" is selected by the character lottery
When "character image B" is selected and "holding change twice" is selected by the change number lottery, the probability of selecting "one-time action" and the probability of selecting "two-time action" are It is prescribed.
Here, the “single action” means that the character image acts on the specific reserved display once (for example, hitting the specific pending display once with a stick), and the “twice action” means the character image. Is to act on the specific hold display twice (for example, hitting the specific hold display twice with a stick).

For example, “1 change on hold” is selected by the change number lottery, and “
When "double action" is selected, the display mode of the specific pending display may be changed by the first action of the character image acting on the specific pending display twice, or the action may be performed twice. The display mode of the specific hold display may be changed by the second action of.
In addition, “holding change 2 times” is selected by the change number lottery and “1 by the action number lottery”.
When "turning action" is selected, it may be changed to the first suggestive aspect and then to the second suggestive aspect, or the second suggestive aspect may be immediately changed to the second suggestive aspect. You may change to the suggestion mode of.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and the result of the variable display game is A game machine that generates a special game state in which a player is given a game value when a special result is obtained, and a predetermined random number is extracted based on the satisfaction of a start condition and stored as a start memory for a variable display game. A means (game control device 100) and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for executing an effect related to the variable display game, and the effect control means includes a predetermined image (character image G1) and start memory. Start memory display corresponding to (Decorative special figure start memory display)
Can be displayed on the display device 41, and as the predetermined notice effect (precursor effect), a first pattern of notice effect in which a predetermined image acts on the start memory display and a predetermined pattern in which the predetermined image does not act on the start memory display. Two patterns of notice production can be executed.
In the case of the present embodiment, the first pattern of notice production is the second type predictive production when the action availability lottery is won, and the second pattern of the notice production is the second case when the action availability lottery is lost.
It is a precursor to the type.

Therefore, the character image G2 may or may not act on the decoration special figure starting memory display, and the movement of the image (character image G2) that can act on the decoration special figure starting memory display is not one pattern. The interest of the game can be enhanced by the image that can act on the figure starting memory display.
In the case of the present embodiment, two patterns are provided: a pattern in which the character image G2 moves to the operating position and acts on the decorative special figure starting memory display, and a pattern in which the character image G2 does not move to the operating position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to these patterns, a pattern in which the character image G2 moves to the operating position but does not act on the decorative special figure starting memory display (the stick is not swung down) or the like may be provided.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can change the display mode of the start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display) in the predetermined notice effect (symptom effect). It is possible to configure such that the rate of changing the display mode of the starting memory display in the first pattern notice effect is higher than the rate of changing the display mode of the starting memory display in the second pattern notice effect ( 44(d) to (g)).

With this configuration, depending on the pattern of the indication effect (that is, by the movement of the image that can act on the decoration special figure starting memory display), the sign effect can change the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display. It can be suggested whether it is a production. Therefore, the player can play the game with a sense of expectation at the stage when the player can recognize that the display effect of the decorative special figure starting memory display is likely to change according to the suggestion, and thus the player can enjoy the game with a sense of expectation. Is improved. Further, not only in the final stage of whether or not the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display changes, but also in the middle of how the image (character image G2) that can act on the decorative special figure starting memory display moves. Since the player's interest can be attracted to the stage as well, it is possible to execute a symptomatic presentation with a high interest.

<Hold change effect>
As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment uses the standby hold display unit 4 as the hold change effect.
1b, the display mode of the decorative special figure start-up memory display that changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start-up memory display and suggests the prefetch result, and the display mode of the decorative special figure start-up memory display displayed in the execution in-progress display section 41c It is possible to execute an on-hold pending change effect that suggests a result or a change pattern of the special figure change display game being executed by changing.
For example, when the movable accessory 44a is in a state of overlapping the front and rear display portions 41b and 41c (
That is, when the holding change effect is executed in the case where the movable accessory 44a is positioned in front of the pending display portions 41b and 41c), the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display is changed by the movable accessory 44a. There is a risk that the state of being present may not be visible (difficult to see). However, in the present embodiment, it is visible whether or not the movable accessory 44a is in the state of overlapping the front and rear display portions 41b and 41c, that is, the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display is changing. Regardless of whether it is impossible (difficult to see), when the execution timing of the pending change effect arrives,
It is assumed that the hold change effect is started and the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display of the change target is changed.

Specifically, in the effect control device 300, for example, as shown in (a) of FIG. 48, the movable special object 44a displays the decoration special figure starting memory display of the change target (here, the decoration special figure starting memory display at the right end). ), the pending change effect (here, the standby pending change effect) is executed,
The display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display to be changed is changed.
Of course, it is also possible to prohibit the execution of the pending change effect during the period in which the movable accessory 44a overlaps the pending display portions 41b and 41c in the front and back. However, when configured in this manner, the movable accessory 44a moves back and forth between the hold display sections 41b and 41c during a period in which the movable accessory 44a overlaps the hold display sections 41b and 41c in the front and back due to a malfunction of the movable accessory 44a. When the inconvenience of non-overlapping occurs, the player cannot enjoy the accessory motion effect production or the hold change effect production.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, execution of the pending change effect is performed regardless of whether or not the movable accessory 44a overlaps the hold display portions 41b and 41c before and after, that is, regardless of the state of the movable accessory 44a. When the timing comes, the hold change effect is started to change the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display of the change target. As a result, even if the movable accessory 44a fails to operate and cannot enjoy the accessory action effect, it is possible to enjoy the pending change effect, and thus it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

Here, if the decoration special figure starting memory display is hidden by the movable accessory 44a and becomes invisible (difficult to visually recognize), there is a possibility that the accurate starting memory number cannot be grasped even if the display on the hold display portions 41b and 41c is viewed. In the present embodiment, since the numeral holding display section 41e is provided separately from the holding display sections 41b and 41c, the accurate starting memory number is grasped even if the decorative special figure starting memory display is invisible (difficult to view). it can.
In addition, in the case of the present embodiment, since the pending change effect is executed regardless of the state of the movable accessory 44a, during the execution of the pending change effect, the movable accessory 44a overlaps with the pending display portions 41b and 41c in the front and back. It may change to a state in which they do not overlap, and the movable accessory 44a is displayed on the hold display unit 41.
b and 41c may change from a state where they do not overlap front and back to a state where they overlap.

It is also possible to execute the pending change effect in an area larger than the size of the movable accessory 44a (the size when the movable accessory 44a is viewed from the front) within the display area of the display device 41. Specifically, for example, as shown in (b) of FIG. 48, as an effect image that enhances the effect effect of the pending change effect, an image (effect image E that has a size protruding from the movable accessory 44a when viewed from the front) is displayed.
Etc.) may be displayed.
As a result, in a state where the movable accessory 44a overlaps the hold display portions 41b and 41c in the front and rear, a display related to the hold change effect (display of the decoration special figure starting memory display of the change target and the decoration special figure starting memory display Since at least a part of the image (effect image E, etc.) related to the change of the aspect is not hidden by the movable accessory, the player can recognize that the pending change effect is being executed.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 48, only a part of the decoration special map start memory display of the change target is hidden by the movable accessory 44a and is invisible (difficult to see), but the decoration special map start of the change target is started. The entire memory display may be hidden by the movable accessory 44a to make it invisible (difficult to see).

In addition, a character image (a predetermined character image associated with the pending change effect) is displayed as an effect image for enhancing the effect of the pending change effect, and the character image is displayed regardless of the state of the movable accessory 44a. An effect that affects the memory display may be performed.
Further, the operation time of the movable accessory 44a may be longer than the execution time of the hold change effect,
It can be short. Further, the operation time of the movable accessory 44a may be the same as the execution time of the hold change effect.

Further, instead of the movable accessory 44a, a character image that can be superimposed and displayed on the hold display portions 41b and 41c may be displayed. In this case, the character image may be displayed in front of the decorative special figure starting memory display, or may be displayed in the back side of the decorative special figure starting memory display.
When the character image is displayed on the front side of the decorative special figure starting memory display, and when the character image and the decorative special figure starting memory display overlap, the character image is displayed in the character image. The part that overlaps the image will be hidden. On the other hand, when the character image is displayed behind the decoration special figure starting memory display, and when the character image and the decoration special figure starting memory display overlap, the decoration special figure starting memory display indicates The portion overlapping the decoration special figure start memory display is hidden.

In addition, the movable accessory 44a is formed of a transparent or semi-transparent member, and the movable accessory 44a is seen through to display a state in which the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display is changed or a display related to the pending change effect. May be configured to be visible. Alternatively, the movable accessory 44a may be provided with a hole or a gap, and the state in which the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display is changing or the display related to the pending change effect can be visually recognized from the hole or the gap. Is also good.

In addition, the movable accessory that can be in a state of overlapping the front and rear of the hold display portions 41b and 41c can be divided into a plurality of parts as shown in FIG. 49, for example, and a gap is not formed between the parts. The movable accessory 44b may be convertible from the state (non-cracked state) to the second state (crack completed state) in which a gap having a predetermined width is formed between the parts.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 50, the execution period of the pending change effect preferably overlaps at least part of the period (t22 to t24) in which the movable accessory 44b is in the crack completed state. As a result, as shown in FIG. 49, for example, from the gap formed in the movable accessory 44b (that is, the gap formed during the period (t21 to t25) in which the movable accessory 44b is not broken). It is possible to visually recognize how the display mode of the figure starting memory display is changing and the display related to the pending change effect. Here, the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display is switched from the display mode before the change to the display mode after the change by the hold change effect, but in the present application, the hold change effect is displayed in the display mode after the change. Ends at the timing to start. Therefore, the pending change effect includes the time when the display mode changes (the period from immediately before the change to immediately after the change (including immediately before the change and immediately after the change)) but not after the change of the display mode. In addition, before the change of the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display, if the effect that blinks the decorative special figure starting memory display is performed to suggest that the display mode is about to change, the effect is also suspended. It may be included in the change effect.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 50, the start timing of the hold change effect is set to be the same as the timing (t21) at which the conversion operation of the movable accessory 44b to the crack completion state is started. The start timing can be changed as appropriate, and is preferably set within a period (t21 to t25) in which the movable accessory 44b is not cracked.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 50, the end timing of the pending change effect is set within the period (t22 to t24) in which the movable accessory 44b is in the crack completed state, but the ending timing of the pending change effect is appropriately set. It is changeable and the period during which the movable accessory 44b is not cracked (t21
Up to t25) is preferable.

Further, when the movable accessory which can be overlapped with the hold display portions 41b and 41c in the front and rear is the movable accessory 44b which can be converted into the uncracked state and the crack completed state, the movable accessory 44b is opened and closed ( The position to perform the conversion operation to the crack complete state, the return operation to return to the uncracked state,
It may be determined based on the position of the decoration special figure starting memory display to be changed.
In the example shown in FIG. 49, of the three decoration special figure start-up memory displays displayed on the standby hold display portion 41b, the decoration special figure start-up memory display at the right end is visually recognized when the movable accessory 44b is in the crack completed state. The decoration special figure starting memory display in the middle is easier to visually recognize when the movable accessory 44b is not broken.
Therefore, for example, by setting the position at which the movable accessory 44b performs the opening/closing operation to a position that overlaps with the decoration special figure start memory display to be changed, the decorative special figure starts from the gap formed in the movable accessory 44b. It is possible to visually recognize how the display mode of the memory display is changing.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and the result of the variable display game is A game machine that generates a special game state in which a player is given a game value when a special result is obtained, and a predetermined random number is extracted based on the satisfaction of a start condition and stored as a start memory for a variable display game. A means (game control device 100) and a start memory display area (standby hold display section 41b, execution hold display) in which a start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display) corresponding to the start memory is provided in the display area of the display device 41 Start memory display control means (effect control device 300) displayed on the portion 41c), a state of being positioned in front of the start memory display area (a state of overlapping front and rear), and a state of retracting from the front of the start memory display area (back and forth). A non-overlapping state) and a movable accessory 44a that can be converted into a start memory display control means that changes the display mode of the start memory display regardless of the state of the movable accessory 44a. (Hold change effect) can be executed.

Therefore, even if a malfunction of the movable accessory occurs and it is no longer possible to enjoy the accessory action effect, it is possible to enjoy the hold change effect, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced by the hold change effect.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and the result of the variable display game is a special result. A game machine that generates a special game state in which a game value is given to a player when, and a start storage means that extracts a predetermined random number based on the satisfaction of a start condition and stores it as a start memory of a variable display game ( (Game control device 100) and a state of being located in front of the start memory display area (standby hold display section 41b, execution hold display section 41c) provided in the display area of the display device 41 (
A movable accessory 44a that can be converted into a state in which it overlaps with the front and rear) and a state with which the start memory display area is retracted from the front (a state in which it does not overlap with the front and rear), and display control for controlling the display content displayed in the display area. Means (effect control device 300), the display control means displays a start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display) corresponding to the start memory in the start memory display area, and displays the start memory display in a predetermined area in the display area. It is possible to execute a start memory display change effect (hold change effect) that changes the display mode of the start memory display and displays an image (effect image E or the like) related to the change.
At least a part of the predetermined area can be configured to be visible from the front even when the movable accessory 44a is located in front of the start memory display area (see FIG. 48(b)).

Therefore, even if the movable accessory 44a is positioned in front of the pending display portions 41b and 41c, at least a part of the display related to the pending change effect is not hidden by the movable accessory, so that the game is changed by the pending change effect. The interest can be increased.
The predetermined area may not be larger than the size of the movable accessory 44a (size when the movable accessory 44a is viewed from the front), and the movable accessory 44a is located in front of the hold display portions 41b and 41c. The size of the predetermined region can be changed as appropriate if at least a part of the region is visible when it is in the position.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and the result of the variable display game is a special result. A game machine that generates a special game state in which a game value is given to a player when, and a start storage means that extracts a predetermined random number based on the satisfaction of a start condition and stores it as a start memory of a variable display game ( A game control device 100) and a start memory display corresponding to the start memory (decorative special figure start memory display) are provided in the display area of the display device 41. The start memory display area (standby hold display section 41b, execution hold display section 41c). ) Display control means (display control device 3)
00), a state of being positioned in front of the start memory display area (a state of overlapping front and rear) and a state of being retracted from the front of the start memory display area (a state of not overlapping front and rear) 44.
b, the movable accessory 44b can be divided into a plurality of parts, and the movable part 44b has a predetermined width between the parts from a first state (a state where no crack is formed) between the parts. It is possible to convert to a second state in which a gap is formed (crack completed state), and the starting memory display control means is
It is possible to execute a start memory display change effect (hold change effect) that changes the display mode of the start memory display, and the movable accessory 44b is the first during the execution period (t21 to t23) of the start memory display change effect.
It can be configured to overlap with at least a part of the period (t22 to t24) in the state (see FIG. 50).

Therefore, even when the movable accessory 44b is positioned in front of the reserved display portions 41b and 41c, the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display changes from the gap formed in the movable accessory 44b. Since it is possible to visually recognize the state of being held and the display related to the pending change effect, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by the pending change effect.

<Suggestive production, switching production, hold production>
The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment can execute a switching effect that switches the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed on the display device 41 to the suggestion mode. As described above, by displaying the decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the standby holding display section 41b in a suggestive manner,
It is possible to suggest a look-ahead result such as a result or a change pattern of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding starting memory. Further, by displaying the decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the execution pending display section 41c in a suggestion mode, it is possible to suggest the result or variation pattern of the special figure variation display game being executed.
Here, "switching the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display to the suggestion mode" includes switching from the normal display mode to the suggestion mode, and a predetermined suggestion mode (for example, the first suggestion mode).
To switching to a suggestion mode different from the predetermined suggestion mode (for example, the second suggestion mode).

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment can execute a suggesting effect that suggests execution of the switching effect before starting the switching effect.
In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment displays (continue to display) the decorative special figure starting memory display after completion of the switching effect, suggests the prefetch result, and changes the special figure being executed. A holding effect that suggests the result of the display game or a variation pattern is executed.

As described above, depending on the hold change effect, the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display is switched from the display mode before the change to the display mode after the change, but in the present application, the hold change effect is the display mode after the change. Ends at the timing of starting the display of. Therefore, the pending change effect includes a time when the display mode changes (a period from immediately before the change to immediately after the change (including immediately before the change and immediately after the change, that is, at the time of the switching effect), but after the change in the display mode (that is, After the end of the switching effect) is not included. In addition, before the change of the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display (that is, before the start of the switching effect), when the effect (indicative effect) that suggests that the display mode is about to change is performed, the effect also changes pending. It may be included in the production.

That is, in the present embodiment, the switching effect (when the display mode is changed) and the suggestive effect (before the display mode is changed) are included in the hold change effect, but the hold effect (after the display mode is changed) is the hold change effect. Not included in.
Before the switching effect is started, the suggesting effect may or may not be executed, and after the switching effect, the holding effect is always executed. In addition, after the suggestion effect is finished, the switching effect may or may not be executed.

FIG. 51A shows an example of the flow until execution of the hold effect.
As shown in FIG. 51A, when a new start memory is generated, the effect control device 300 starts displaying the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory (target start memory). Figure 5
In the example shown in FIG. 1A, the decoration special figure starting memory display (starting memory display) corresponding to the target starting memory is displayed in a normal display mode.
In the present embodiment, the sound effect associated with the display start of the decorative special figure starting memory display is not output, but the sound effect associated with the start of the display of the decorative special figure starting memory display is output. You may do it.
The display modes of the decorative special figure starting memory display include a still image mode in which the decorative special figure starting memory display is statically displayed, and a moving image mode in which the decorative special figure starting memory display is animated. In the present embodiment, the normal display mode is a still image mode, and the suggestion mode includes a still image mode and a moving image mode. Hereinafter, the still image mode of the suggestive modes is referred to as a “still image suggestive mode”, and the moving image mode of the suggested modes is referred to as a “moving image suggestive mode”.

When a new start memory is generated, the effect control device 300 performs a lottery process for a pending change effect (a lottery process for determining whether to execute the pending change effect) for the start memory (target starting memory). )I do. In the lottery process of the pending change effect, whether to execute the switching effect,
It is determined whether or not the suggestive effect is executed. In addition, when the execution of the switching effect is determined, the effect contents of the switching effect (the number and timing of executing the switching effect, the display mode after the switching, etc.)
Is also determined by the lottery process for the pending change effect. When the execution of the suggestive effect is determined, the effect content of the suggestive effect is also determined by the lottery process for the pending change effect. Here, in the suggestive production,
Decorative special figure corresponding to target starting memory Suggestive effect of hold change type suggesting execution of switching effect depending on display mode of starting memory display, and suggestive image acting on decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to target starting memory There is a suggestive effect of the suggestive image type that suggests the execution of the switching effect by the display of.
In this way, in the lottery process of the pending change effect, a plurality of items are determined, but all items may be determined in one lottery, or a plurality of items of lottery (for example, a lottery indicating whether or not the switching effect is executed, Each item may be sequentially determined by performing a lottery of the effect contents of the switching effect, a lottery of whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, and a lottery of the effect contents of the suggestive effect.

Then, in the hold change effect lottery process, if execution of the suggestion effect is determined and the decided effect content of the suggestion effect is the hold change type, the effect control device 300 sets the hold change type at a predetermined timing. Perform suggestive performance. Thereby, the execution of the switching effect is suggested by the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the target starting memory (for example, by blinking the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the target starting memory). ..
If the execution of the suggestive effect is determined in the lottery process for the pending change effect, and the determined effect content of the suggestive effect is the suggestive image type, the effect control device 300 selects the suggestive image type at a predetermined timing. Perform suggestive performance. Thereby, for example, as shown in FIG.
Execution of the switching effect is suggested by the display of a suggestion image (in the example shown in FIG. 51(b), an image that imitates a sword) that acts on the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the target start memory. Note that FIG.
In 1(b), a suggestion image acting on the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed on the standby hold display portion 41b is displayed, but in the suggestion of the suggestion image type, it is displayed on the execution hold display portion 41c. It is also possible to display a suggestive image that acts on the displayed decorative special figure starting memory display.
On the other hand, when the non-execution of the suggested effect is determined in the lottery process for the pending change effect, the effect control device 300 does not execute any type of suggested effect.

In the present embodiment, the pending change type suggestive effect is an effect without a sound effect. Therefore, while the hold change type suggestive effect is being executed, sound effects for other effects (effects other than the hold change type suggestive effect) are output from the speakers 19a and 19b, but for the hold change type suggestive effect. Since the sound effect is not output, it is possible to give the player a moderate sense of expectation, and it becomes easier to hear the sound effect for other effects than when the effect sound for the suggestion effect of the hold change type is output.
Further, in the present embodiment, the suggestive effect of the suggestive image type is an effect with a sound effect.
Therefore, while the suggestive effect of the suggestive image type is being executed, sound effects for other effects (effects other than the suggestive effect of the suggestive image type) are output from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the suggestive image type of the effect is generated at a predetermined timing. Since the effect sound for suggestive effect is also output from the speakers 19a and 19b, it is possible to appeal the execution of the suggestive effect.

The hold change type suggestive effect often has lower expectations for the player than the suggestive image type suggestive effect, so even if the execution of the hold change type suggestive effect is appealed, the player's expectation may not increase. It has a high quality. Moreover, since the execution time of the suggestion effect of the pending change type is often longer than that of the suggestion effect of the suggestion image type, even if the effect sound for the suggestion effect of the suggestion image type is output, it is not Although it does not affect listening, the output of the effect sound for the suggestion effect of the pending change type is likely to cause inconveniences such as making it difficult to hear the effect sound for other effects. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect sound for the suggestion effect of the hold change type is not output.

In addition, when execution of the switching effect is determined in the lottery process for the pending change effect, the effect control device 300 executes the switching effect at a predetermined timing. As a result, the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the target start memory is switched to the display mode (display mode after switching) determined in the lottery process of the pending change effect.
Next, the effect control device 300 executes the holding effect following the switching effect. In the hold effect, the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory of the target is displayed in a still image suggesting mode (continue to be displayed) to suggest the look-ahead result, or the special figure variation display game being executed. A still image type holding effect that suggests results and fluctuation patterns, and a decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory of the target are displayed in a video suggestion mode (continue to be displayed) to suggest the look-ahead result. Or
There is a moving-image-type hold effect that suggests the result or variation pattern of the special figure variation display game being executed. When the display mode after switching determined by the lottery process of the hold change effect is the still image suggestion mode, the still image type hold effect is executed and the display after switching determined by the lottery process of the hold change effect When the mode is the moving image suggesting mode, a moving image type holding effect is executed.

On the other hand, when the non-execution of the switching effect is determined in the lottery process for the hold change effect, the hold effect regarding the target starting memory is not being executed (that is, the decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the target starting memory is displayed. , The current display mode is a normal display mode), the effect control device 3
In 00, neither the switching effect nor the holding effect is executed. In addition, when the non-execution of the switching effect is determined in the lottery process of the pending change effect, the pending effect regarding the starting memory of the target is being executed (that is, the decorative special figure starting memory corresponding to the starting memory of the target. If the current display mode of the display is the suggestion mode), the effect control device 300 does not execute the switching effect and continues the hold effect.

In the present embodiment, the switching effect is an effect with a sound effect. Therefore, while the switching effect is being executed, sound effects for other effects (effects other than the switching effect) are output from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the effect sound for switching effect is also output from the speakers 19a and 19b at a predetermined timing. Since it is output, the execution of the switching effect can be appealed.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the holding effect is an effect without a sound effect. Therefore, while the still image type holding effect is being executed or the moving image type holding effect is being executed, the sound effects for other effects (effects other than the holding effect) are output from the speakers 19a and 19b. Since no sound effect is output, it is possible to give the player a moderate sense of expectation, and it becomes easier to hear other effect sound effects than when the effect sound for hold effect is output.

The holding effect is an effect that is executed subsequent to the switching effect, and is executed whenever the switching effect is executed. Therefore, if the execution of the switching effect is appealed by a sound effect, the execution of the holding effect is effected. The need to appeal by is low. In addition, the holding effect often has a longer execution time than the switching effect, so even if the effect sound for the switching effect is output, it does not significantly affect the listening of the effect sound for other effects. When the sound is output, there is a high possibility that inconveniences such as making it difficult to hear other effect sound effects will occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sound effect for holding effect is not output.

Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 51A, if a power failure occurs during the display of the decoration special figure starting memory display, the display is interrupted. After that, when the power is restored, the effect control device 300 restarts the display. Since the information about the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display stored in the effect control device 300 is deleted by the power failure, the decoration special figure starting memory display is displayed in a display mode other than the normal display mode before the power failure occurs. Even if it has been done, it will be displayed in the normal display mode (default display mode) after the power failure is restored.
In the present embodiment, the sound effect is not output when the display of the decorative special figure starting memory display is restarted (that is, when the display is restarted when the power is restored). As a result, it is possible to prevent a variety of sound effects from being mixed when the power is restored and the interest in the game is reduced.
Here, the "effect-free effect" in the present application may be an effect in which audio data itself for outputting the effect sound for the effect is not stored in the audio ROM 327 or the like, or the effect for the effect. Although the voice data for outputting the sound is stored in the voice ROM 327 or the like, the voice based on the voice data may not be output from the speakers 19a and 19b.

In the example shown in FIG. 51A, the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory of the target is initially displayed in the normal display mode, but it may be displayed in the suggesting mode from the beginning. Is. In this case, the switching effect is not executed, and the hold effect is started immediately after the display of the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the target start memory is started. When the switching effect is executed, the execution of the holding effect can be appealed by the sound effect for the switching effect, but when the holding effect is executed without executing the switching effect, the effect sound for the switching effect is generated. Since it is not output, the execution of the hold effect cannot be appealed by the sound effect for switching effect. Therefore, when the hold effect is executed without executing the switching effect, it is possible to output the sound effect when the hold effect is started.

The suggestion effect of the hold change type suggests the execution of the switching effect by the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display (the display mode for the suggestion effect of the hold change type), but the display for the suggestive effect of the hold change type. As a mode, there may be a plurality of types of display modes with different expectations (expectations of a big hit, expectations of reach occurrence, etc.). Further, in this case, the presence or absence of the sound effect may be determined depending on the type of display mode. Specifically, for example, the display mode for the pending change type suggestive effect is divided into two groups, a group A (for example, a high expectation group) and a group B (for example, a low expectation group), and the decoration special diagram In the display mode that displays the starting memory display in the display mode belonging to the group A, the suggestion effect of the hold change type that suggests the execution of the switching effect is the effect with sound effect, and the decorative special figure starting memory display is in the display mode that belongs to the group B. The suggestion effect of the hold change type that is displayed and suggests the execution of the switching effect may be an effect without a sound effect. In this case, the degree of expectation can be grasped by the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display (display mode for suggestion effect of hold change type), and can also be grasped by the presence or absence of the sound effect.

In addition, the display mode is common, and when the expectation of the special figure variation display game based on the target starting memory is high, the effect with sound effect is executed as the suggestion effect of the hold change type, and the target starting memory is stored. When the expectation of the special figure variation display game is low, the effect without the sound effect may be executed as the suggestion effect of the hold change type. In this case, the degree of expectation cannot be grasped in the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display (display mode for suggestion effect of hold change type), but can be grasped by the presence or absence of the sound effect.

Further, the suggestive effect of the suggestive image type suggests the execution of the switching effect by displaying the suggestive image that acts on the decorative special figure starting memory display, but even if there are a plurality of suggestive images with different expectations as the suggestive image. good. Furthermore, in this case, the presence or absence of the sound effect may be determined depending on the type of the suggestive image. Specifically, for example, the suggestive image is divided into two groups, a group C (for example, a high-expectancy group) and a group D (for example, a low-expectancy group), and suggestive images belonging to the group C are displayed and switched. The suggestive effect of the suggestive image type suggesting the execution of the effect is set as the effect with the sound effect, and the suggestive image of the suggestive image type indicating the execution of the switching effect is displayed by displaying the suggestive image belonging to the group D. Good as a production. In this case, the degree of expectation can be grasped by the suggestion image and can be grasped by the presence or absence of the sound effect.

When the special image variation display game based on the starting memory of the target has a high degree of expectation, the suggestive image is used as a suggestive effect of the suggestive image type to execute the effect with the sound effect. When the expectation of the special figure variation display game based on it is low, the effect without the sound effect may be executed as the suggestive effect of the suggestive image type. In this case, the degree of expectation cannot be grasped by the suggestion image, but can be grasped by the presence or absence of the sound effect.

Further, the suggestion mode may include a plurality of types of suggestion modes with different expectations. Further, in this case, the presence or absence of the sound effect may be determined depending on the type of the suggestion mode.
Specifically, for example, the suggestion mode is divided into two groups, a group E (for example, a high-expectancy group) and a group F (for example, a low-expectancy group), and the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display is grouped. The switching effect to switch to the suggestion mode belonging to E is an effect with sound effect,
The switching effect for switching the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display to the suggestion mode belonging to the group F may be an effect without a sound effect. In this case, the level of expectation can be grasped in the display mode (indication mode) after switching and also in the presence or absence of the sound effect.
Further, for example, a holding effect for displaying a decoration special figure starting memory display in a suggestion mode belonging to group E is an effect with sound effect, and a holding effect for displaying a decoration special figure starting memory display in a suggestion mode belonging to group F. , It is also good as a production without sound effects. In this case, the degree of expectation can be grasped by the display mode (indication mode) of the decorative special figure starting memory display and also by the presence or absence of the sound effect.

In addition, the display mode (indication mode) after switching is common, and when the expectation of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory of the target is high, the effect with the sound effect is executed as the switching effect, and the target effect is displayed. When the expectation of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory is low, an effect without a sound effect may be executed as the switching effect. In this case, the high and low expectations are displayed after switching (indication)
It is not possible to understand it, but it can be understood by the presence or absence of sound effects.
Further, the display mode (indication mode) of the decorative special figure start memory display is common, and when the expectation of the special figure variable display game based on the target start memory is high, the effect with the sound effect is executed as the hold effect. However, when the expectation of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory of the target is low, an effect without a sound effect may be executed as a holding effect. In this case, the degree of expectation cannot be grasped in the display mode (indication mode) of the decorative special figure starting memory display, but can be grasped by the presence or absence of the sound effect.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and the result of the variable display game is A game machine that generates a special game state in which a player is given a game value when a special result is obtained, and a predetermined random number is extracted based on satisfaction of a start condition, and is stored as start memory for a variable display game. In the variable display game, a storage unit (game control device 100), a start memory display control unit (effect control device 300) that displays a start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display) corresponding to the start memory on the display device 41. The effect control means (effect control device 300) for executing the related effect, and the display mode of the start memory display includes a still image mode and a moving image mode, and the effect control means controls the start memory display. It is possible to execute a switching effect that switches the display mode from the still image mode to the moving image mode, a suggesting effect that suggests execution of the switching effect, and a holding effect that displays the start memory display in the moving image mode, and the suggesting effect is an effect. Production accompanied by sound output (production with sound effects)
The hold effect is an effect without output of a sound effect (effect without sound effect).

Therefore, it is possible to avoid such inconvenience that various sound effects are mixed and it becomes difficult for the player to hear the sound effect that the player prefers to hear.
Here, the “effect without output of sound effects” may be an effect in which the audio data itself for outputting the effect sound for the effect is not stored in the audio ROM 327 or the like, or The voice data for outputting the sound effect may be an effect in which the voice based on the voice data is not output although the voice data is stored in the voice ROM 327 or the like.

The decorative special figure starting memory display can be switched from a still image mode to a moving image mode or can be switched from a moving image mode to a still image mode by the switching effect. It is also possible to switch from the mode to a second still image mode different from the first still image mode, or to switch from the first moving image mode to a second moving image mode different from the first moving image mode. is there.
That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display)
There are a first moving image mode and a second moving image mode, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) switches the display mode of the start memory display from the first moving image mode to the second moving image mode. The switching effect, the suggestion effect that suggests the execution of the switching effect, and the hold effect that displays the start memory display in the second moving image mode can be configured to be executable.
Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display) includes a moving image mode and a still image mode, and an effect control means (effect control device 300).
Is capable of performing a switching effect that switches the display mode of the starting memory display from the moving image mode to the still image mode, a suggesting effect that suggests execution of the switching effect, and a holding effect that displays the starting memory display in the still image mode. It can be configured to be.
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display) includes the first still image mode and the second still image mode, and the effect control means (effect). The control device 300) switches the display mode of the start memory display from the first still image mode to the second still image mode, the suggestive effect that suggests execution of the switch effect, and the start memory display as the second still image mode. It is possible to configure so that the hold effect displayed by is executable.
With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the switching effect can be configured to be an effect accompanied by the output of a sound effect.
With such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the display mode of the starting memory display is switched, so that the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced by the sound effect.
In the present embodiment, the switching effect is an effect with a sound effect, but the switching effect can be an effect without a sound effect.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and the result of the variable display game is a special result. A game machine that generates a special game state in which a game value is given to the player, and a predetermined random number is extracted based on the satisfaction of a start condition, and is stored as start memory for the variable display game. (Game control device 100) and a start memory display control means (display control device 3) for displaying a start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display) corresponding to the start memory on the display device 41.
00) and effect control means (effect control device 300) for executing effects related to the variable display game.
) And, the display mode of the starting memory display includes a still image mode and a moving image mode, and the effect control means, when the display mode of the starting memory display switches from the still image mode to the moving image mode, When a sound effect is output from the sound source device (speakers 19a and 19b) and a power failure occurs while the start memory display is displayed, and the power recovery is resumed and the display of the start memory display is restarted, Does not output sound effects.

Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that various sound effects are mixed when the power is restored and it becomes difficult to hear the sound effect that the player wants to hear preferentially.
In the present embodiment, the sound effect is not output when the display of the decorative special figure starting memory display is restarted (when the display of the decorative special figure starting memory display is restarted after the power failure is restored). It is also possible to output a sound effect when the display of the start memory display is restarted.

In addition, it is possible to output a sound effect when the decorative special figure starting memory display is switched from the still image mode to the moving image mode, and it is also possible to output a sound effect when switching from the moving image mode to the still image mode. It is possible to output the sound effect when switching from the first still image mode to the second still image mode different from the first still image mode, and from the first moving image mode to the first moving image mode.
It is also possible to output a sound effect when switching to the second moving image mode different from the moving image mode.
That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display)
There are a first moving image mode and a second moving image mode, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) changes the display mode of the start memory display from the first moving image mode to the second moving image mode. At the time of switching, a sound effect is output from the sound source device (speakers 19a, 19b), a power failure occurs while the start memory display is displayed, and when the power failure is recovered and the display of the start memory display is restarted, The sound source device can be configured not to output sound effects.
Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display) includes a moving image mode and a still image mode, and an effect control means (effect control device 300).
When the display mode of the start memory display is switched from the moving image mode to the still image mode, a sound effect is output from the sound source device (speakers 19a and 19b), and a power failure occurs while the start memory display is displayed. When the power failure is recovered and the display of the starting memory display is restarted, the sound source device may be configured not to output the sound effect.
Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, there are a first still image aspect and a second still image aspect in the display mode of the start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display), and the effect control means (effect). When the display mode of the start memory display is switched from the first still image mode to the second still image mode, the control device 300) outputs a sound effect from the sound source device (speakers 19a, 19b) and the start memory display is displayed. When a power failure occurs while the power failure occurs, the sound source device can be configured not to output the sound effect when the power failure is recovered and the display of the start memory display is restarted.
With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

<Display of decorative special figure starting memory>
An example of the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed on the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 65. 52 to 65, some of the "centroids (centers)" of the decoration special figure starting memory display are indicated by dots, but such "centroids" are not actually displayed. Also, FIG.
In FIG. 65, there is one in which the “fixed position” of the decoration special figure starting memory display is indicated by a dashed line, but such a “fixed position” is not actually displayed. Further, in some of FIGS. 52 to 65, “auxiliary lines” and the like are indicated by broken lines, but in reality, such “auxiliary lines” and the like are not displayed.
In the present embodiment, since the special figure variation display game is executed in the winning order to the start winning area, for example, as shown in FIG. To be done.

Hereinafter, the decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the standby holding display section 41b is referred to as "standby pending", and the decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the running pending display section 41c is referred to as "running pending". Further, among the pending holdings, the waiting pending corresponding to the oldest starting memory (that is, the starting memory stored first) is referred to as “waiting pending 1”, and corresponds to the second oldest starting memory. The waiting hold that is performed is referred to as “waiting hold 2”, and the waiting holds corresponding to the 3rd to 8th oldest starting memories are “waiting hold 3”, “waiting hold 4”, and “waiting hold”, respectively. 5”, “standby hold 6”, “standby hold 7” and “standby hold 8”. When the number of undigested start memories is eight, the pending hold 1 is displayed at the position closest to the running pending display unit 41c (in the present embodiment, the left end of the waiting pending display unit 41b), The pending hold 8 is displayed at the farthest position from the running pending display portion 41c (in the present embodiment, the right end of the waiting pending display portion 41b).
52 to 65 exemplify a case in which eight standby holdings are displayed, of course, the number of standby holdings is not limited to eight, and depends on the number of undigested starting memories. Becomes a number.

For example, as shown in FIG. 52, the center-of-gravity interval (inter-center-of-gravity distance) between adjoining pending holds is set to a distance d1. That is, the waiting hold is arranged at equal intervals. Therefore, when a plurality of waiting holds are displayed (that is, when there are a plurality of undigested starting memories), these waiting holds can be arranged in the waiting hold display section 41b with a good appearance.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 52, the center-of-gravity interval between the pending execution and the pending pending (standby pending 1) adjacent to the pending execution is set to a distance d0 that is longer than the distance d1. That is, the pending execution is arranged apart from the waiting pending group. Therefore, since there is a difference in the center of gravity interval between the pending execution and the waiting pending and the center of gravity interval between the waiting pendings, it is possible to easily distinguish the pending pending from the pending pending.

In the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 starts the hold shift effect in which the decorative special figure starting memory display is shifted to the adjacent side when the special figure variable display game starts.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53, for example, when the special figure variation display game ends, the execution pending (display of the decorative special figure starting memory with grid hatching in the figure) disappears. And
When the next special figure variation display game starts, the waiting pending corresponding to the next special figure variation displaying game, that is, the waiting pending 1 (decorative special figure starting memory display with polka dots hatched in the figure) is waiting pending The display section 41b is shifted (moved) to the execution-in-progress display section 41c to be in execution-on-hold, and at the same time, it is on-hold on the second special figure variation display game. The decorative special figure start-up memory display with hatching is shifted (moved) in the waiting and holding display portion 41b to become the waiting holdings 1 to 7.

At the time of the holding shift effect, waiting holding (moving inside the waiting holding display section 41b)
8) shifts while maintaining the center-of-gravity interval between adjacent waiting holds at the distance d1.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 54, the waiting holdings (waiting holdings 2 to 8) moving in the waiting holding display portion 41b start shifting at the same timing (t31).
, The shift ends at the same timing (t32), and shifts at the same moving speed.
As a result, the waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) that moves in the waiting hold display unit 41b is respectively the center of gravity G1 of the waiting hold and the waiting hold (waiting hold 1) adjacent to the waiting hold.
Can be shifted while maintaining a constant distance from the center of gravity G1 (excluding).
Here, "starting the shift" means starting from a fixed position before the shift, and "ending the shift" means arriving at the fixed position after the shift. For example, as shown in FIG. 54, in the waiting pending 8, the fixed position before the shift is the fixed position of the waiting pending 8, and the fixed position after the shift is the fixed position of the waiting pending 7.

In addition, waiting hold (waiting hold 1) that moves to the running hold display unit 41c is, for example, as illustrated in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 4, in order to start the shift at the same timing as the standby hold (standby hold 2 to 8) that moves in the standby hold display portion 41b and end the shift at the same timing, the standby hold The shift is performed at a higher speed than the standby hold (standby hold 2 to 8) that shifts in the display unit 41b.
The movement distance of the waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) that moves in the waiting hold display unit 41b is the distance d1 and moves to the waiting hold (waiting hold 1) that moves to the running hold display unit 41c. The distance is a distance d0 that is longer than the distance d1. Therefore, the shift start timing and the shift end timing are set as the pending hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) that moves in the standby hold display portion 41b.
In order to make it the same as ), it is moved to the execution hold display section 41c.
), it is necessary to shift at a higher speed than the waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) that shifts in the waiting hold display portion 41b. As a result, the pending hold (moving to the pending hold display portion 41c (
The waiting hold 1) shifts while gradually changing the center-of-gravity interval with the waiting hold (waiting hold 2) adjacent to the waiting hold (specifically, gradually increasing from the distance d1). It will be.

In the example shown in FIG. 54, each of the waiting hold (waiting hold 1 to 8) is shifted while keeping the moving speed constant, but each waiting hold (waiting hold 1 to 8). The moving speed of does not have to be constant. Specifically, in the hold shift effect, each hold on hold (standby hold 1 to 8) can be shifted while gradually decelerating, or, for example, gradually accelerating as shown in FIG. 55. It is also possible to shift while.
Even if the moving speed is not constant, the shift start timing and the moving speed (instantaneous moving speed) are set to be the same as shown in FIG. The holds 2 to 8) can be shifted in a state in which the distance between the centers of gravity of the adjacent holds during waiting is maintained at the distance d1.

Further, in the example illustrated in FIG. 54, the waiting hold (waiting hold 1) that moves to the running hold display unit 41c is more than the waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) that moves in the waiting hold display unit 41b. Is shifting at a high speed, but is not limited to this.
Specifically, during the hold shift effect, the waiting hold (waiting hold 1) that moves to the running hold display unit 41c is the waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) that moves in the waiting hold display unit 41b. ) May be performed at a lower speed, or as shown in FIG. 56, for example, may be shifted at the same moving speed as the waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) moving in the waiting hold display portion 41b. good.

As described above, waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) moving in the waiting hold display section 41b.
Is a distance d1, and the moving distance of the waiting hold (waiting hold 1) that moves to the running hold display unit 41c is a distance d0 that is longer than the distance d1. Therefore, the waiting hold (waiting hold 1) that moves to the running hold display unit 41c shifts at the same movement speed as the waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) that moves in the waiting hold display unit 41b. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 56, even if each waiting hold (waiting hold 1 to 8) starts shifting at the same timing (t35), the waiting move to move in the waiting hold display section 41b is performed first. Medium Hold (Holding Hold 2-8
The shift of () is completed (t36), and after that, the shift of the waiting hold (waiting hold 1) that moves to the running hold display unit 41c is finished (t37). At that time, the waiting hold (waiting hold 1) that moves to the running hold display unit 41c is the waiting hold (moving in the waiting hold display unit 41b).
Until the shift of the waiting hold 2 to 8) is completed (t35 to t36), the center of gravity interval with the adjacent waiting hold (waiting hold 2) is shifted at the distance d1 and the waiting hold display unit is displayed. Four
After the shift of the waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) moving in 1b is completed (t36 to t
37), the center-of-gravity interval between the adjacent waiting hold (waiting hold 2) is gradually increased from the distance d1 and is shifted.

Also, the shift start timing of waiting hold (waiting hold 1) moving to the running hold display unit 41c, and the shift start timing of waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) moving in the waiting hold display unit 41b. And need not be the same.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 57, during the pending shift effect, the pending pending display section 41
The standby hold (waiting hold 1) moving to c may start the shift at a timing earlier than the waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) moving in the standby hold display portion 41b. in this case,
A holding shift such that the waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) moving in the waiting hold display portion 41b follows the waiting hold (waiting hold 1) that moves to the running hold display portion 41c. You can direct.
In the example shown in FIG. 57, the pending hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) that moves in the waiting hold display unit 41b is the waiting hold (waiting hold 1) that moves to the executing hold display unit 41c. Although the shift is started before the timing (t40) at which the shift is finished, the standby holding display unit 4
The timing of starting the shift of the waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) moving in 1b is the timing of ending the shift of the waiting hold (waiting hold 1) moving to the running hold display unit 41c (t40). ), before, at the same time, or after.

Alternatively, for example, as shown in FIG. 58, during the hold shift effect, the execution hold display section 41c
The waiting hold (moving to hold 1) moving to may start the shift at a later timing than the waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) moving in the waiting hold display portion 41b. In this case, the waiting hold (waiting hold 1) moved to the running holding display part 41c by the shift of the waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) moving in the waiting hold display part 41b is the waiting hold display part. It is possible to perform a hold shift effect that is pushed out from 41b.
In the example illustrated in FIG. 58, the waiting hold (waiting hold 1) that moves to the running hold display unit 41c is the waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) that moves in the waiting hold display unit 41b. Although the shift is started before the timing (t44) at which the shift is completed, the timing of starting the shift of the waiting hold (waiting hold 1) to move to the running hold display unit 41c is the wait hold display unit. It may be before, at the same time, or after the timing (t44) at which the shift of the on-hold hold (standby hold 2 to 8) moving in 41b is completed.

In addition, the shift start timings of the pending hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) moving in the standby hold display portion 41b may not be the same.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 59, during the hold shift effect, the standby hold display section 41b.
For the pending hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) that moves inside, the shift may be sequentially started from the waiting hold near the running hold display unit 41c. In this case, the waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) that moves in the waiting hold display unit 41b is the immediately preceding waiting hold (that is, the running hold display unit 41).
It is possible to perform a holding shift effect such that the c-side shifts following an adjacent waiting hold). However, in this case, waiting hold (waiting hold 2
8 to 8) are shifted in a state in which the distance between the centers of gravity of the adjacent waiting reservations is not maintained at the distance d1.

In the example illustrated in FIG. 59, the waiting hold (waiting hold 1) that moves to the running hold display unit 41c is more than the waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) that moves in the waiting hold display unit 41b. Although the shift has been started before, the timing of starting the shift of the waiting hold (waiting hold 1) to move to the running hold display unit 41c is as follows:
Timing of starting the shift from the pending hold that shifts first among the pending holds 2 to 8 (
It may be before, at the same time, or after t47).
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 59, the standby hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) that moves in the standby hold display portion 41b starts the shift before the timing when the shift of the immediately preceding hold hold ends. However, the timing of starting the shift of the waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) moving in the waiting hold display portion 41b is before, at the same time, and after the timing of ending the shift of the immediately preceding hold hold. Either may be used. That is, for example, the pending hold 8 starts the shift before the timing at which the shift of the pending hold 7 that is the immediately preceding pending hold ends, but the timing of starting the shift of the waiting hold 8 is The timing may be before, at the same time, or after the timing of ending the shift of the waiting hold 7.

Alternatively, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 60, during the hold shift effect, the waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) that moves in the waiting hold display unit 41b is changed from the waiting hold that is far from the running hold display unit 41c. The shift may be started in order. In this case, the waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) that moves in the waiting hold display unit 41b is immediately after the waiting hold (that is, the running hold display unit 41).
It is possible to perform a holding shift effect such that the holding shift effect is pushed out from a fixed position (specifically, a fixed position before the shift) by a shift of an adjacent waiting hold on the opposite side to c. However, also in this case, the waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) moving in the waiting hold display portion 41b is shifted without maintaining the distance between the centers of gravity of the adjacent waiting holds at the distance d1. ..

In the example illustrated in FIG. 60, the waiting hold (waiting hold 1) that moves to the running hold display unit 41c is more than the waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) that moves in the waiting hold display unit 41b. Although the shift is started later, the timing of starting the shift of the waiting hold (waiting hold 1) to move to the running hold display unit 41c is as follows:
The timing at which the pending hold that shifts last among the pending holds 2 to 8 starts the shift (
It may be before, at the same time, or after t60).
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 60, the waiting hold (moving on hold 2 to 8) moving in the waiting hold display portion 41b starts the shift before the timing at which the shift of the waiting hold immediately after is ended. However, the timing of starting the shift of the waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) moving in the waiting hold display portion 41b is before, at the same time, and after the timing of ending the shift of the waiting hold immediately after. Either may be used. That is, for example, the waiting hold 7 starts the shift immediately before the timing at which the shift of the waiting hold 8 that is the waiting hold immediately after that ends, but the timing of starting the shift of the waiting hold 7 is The timing may be before, at the same time, or after the timing of ending the shift of the pending hold 8.

In addition, the moving speeds of the waiting holdings (waiting holdings 2 to 8) that move in the waiting holding display portion 41b may not be the same. Also in this case, the waiting hold (moving in the waiting hold display portion 41b) (
In the pending hold 2 to 8), the center of gravity interval between adjacent pending holds is shifted without maintaining the distance d1.

In addition, the shift start timing of each of the above-described waiting suspensions (standby suspensions 1 to 8), whether or not shifting is performed in a state where the traveling speed is kept constant, and the traveling speed can be appropriately combined.
That is, in the example shown in FIGS. 56 to 60, each of the waiting suspensions (standby suspensions 1 to 8) shifts in a state where the moving speed is kept constant. It is also possible to shift each of the waiting holdings (waiting holdings 1 to 8) while changing the moving speed.
Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 57 to 60, the pending hold (moving to the pending hold display portion 41c) (
The waiting hold 1) is a holding hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) that moves in the waiting hold display portion 41b.
Although the shift is performed at a higher speed than in the example shown in FIG.
The waiting hold (waiting hold 1) moving to 1c may be shifted at a lower speed than the waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) moving in the waiting hold display unit 41b, or the waiting hold display unit. It is also possible to shift at the same movement speed as that of the waiting hold (waiting hold 2 to 8) moving in 41b.

Here, it is also possible to make the display mode of the hold during execution different from the display mode of the hold during standby. That is, it is also possible to display the pending execution in a display mode that is not selected as the standby pending display mode.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the display area (size) of the pending execution may be made larger than the display area of the pending suspension. Alternatively, the display area of the pending execution may be smaller than the display area of the pending suspension. Note that the different display modes may be other than the display area, and may be, for example, the shape or the color.
When the display mode (for example, the display area) is different between the pending execution and the waiting pending, the waiting pending (waiting pending 1) that moves to the running pending display unit 41c is displayed after arriving at the running pending display unit 41c. The display mode may change, or the display mode may change during the shift to the in-execution pending display section 41c.

Furthermore, when the display mode (for example, display area) is different between the pending execution and the standby pending,
For example, as shown in FIG. 62, the center-of-gravity interval between the pending execution and the pending pending (standby pending 1) adjacent to the pending pending is set to the distance d1 which is the same as the center-of-gravity interval between the adjacent pending holds. You may.
When the display mode (for example, the display area) is the same for the execution-on-hold and the standby-on-hold, in order to easily distinguish the execution-on-hold and the standby-on-hold, for example, as illustrated in FIG. A difference is provided between the center-of-gravity interval between the "standby hold" and the "center-of-wait hold". On the other hand, when the display mode (for example, the display area) is different between the executing hold and the waiting hold, the executing hold and the waiting hold can be distinguished by the difference in the display mode. Therefore, when the display mode is different between the executing hold and the waiting hold, it is possible to distinguish the executing hold and the waiting hold without providing a difference in the center-of-gravity interval. That is, in the case where the display mode is different between the pending execution and the pending pending, as shown in FIG. 62, for example, the pending pending and the pending pending (standby pending 1
) Is set to the same distance d1 as the distance between the centers of gravity of adjacent holdings,
There is no inconvenience such that it is difficult to distinguish the pending execution from the pending reservation.

It is also possible to place the pending execution outside the queue of the pending pending. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 52, the center of gravity G1 of each pending hold is arranged on the straight line L, and the center of gravity G of the pending pending is G.
Although 0 is also arranged on the straight line L, the center of gravity G0 of the pending execution need not be arranged on the straight line L as shown in FIG. 63(a), for example.
If the running center of gravity G0 is not located on the straight line L (that is, on the same straight line as the waiting center of gravity G1), the running pending center of gravity G0 and the one waiting pending center of gravity G1 , The line connecting the center of gravity G1 of the waiting pending adjacent to the one waiting pending forms a triangle having these three points as vertices. In the case of this embodiment, since the waiting pending is arranged at equal intervals,
Triangles having three points, that is, the center of gravity G0 of the pending suspension, the center of gravity G1 of the pending pending, and the center of gravity G1 of the pending pending adjacent to the one pending pending all have the same area.

That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 63(b), the area of a triangle T12 having three vertices as the center of gravity G0 of the pending hold, the center of gravity G11 of the pending hold 1 and the center of gravity G12 of the pending hold 2 and the execution The area of a triangle T23 having three points of the center of gravity G0 of middle hold, the center of gravity G12 of waiting hold 2, and the center of gravity G13 of hold pending 3 as vertices, the center of gravity G0 of pending hold and the center of gravity G13 of pending hold 3, and The area of a triangle T34 having three points with the center of gravity G14 of the pending hold 4 as vertices, and the three points of the center of gravity G0 of the pending hold, the center of gravity G14 of the pending hold 4 and the center of gravity G15 of the pending hold 5 as vertices. Area of the triangle T45 to be performed, the center of gravity G0 of the pending hold, the center of gravity G15 of the pending hold 5, and the pending hold 6
Area of a triangle T56 having three points as its vertices with the center of gravity G16 of the triangle T67, and a triangle T67 having three points of the center of gravity G0 of the pending hold, the center of gravity G16 of the pending hold 6 and the center of gravity G17 of the pending hold 7 as the vertices. Area, center of gravity G0 of pending hold, center of gravity G17 of pending hold 7, and center of gravity G18 of pending hold 8
And the area of a triangle T78 having three points as vertices are the same.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 63(b), when the center of gravity G0 of the pending execution is not arranged on the straight line L, the pending pending and the pending pending adjacent to the pending pending (waiting) When the distance between the center of gravity with the hold 1) is set to a distance d0 that is longer than the distance d1 (that is, the distance between the centers of gravity of the adjacent waiting holds), the running center of gravity G0 and the intersection point P (specifically, Has
Intersection of the straight line L and the perpendicular line drawn from the center of gravity G0 of the pending execution to the straight line L), and the pending waiting 1
The area of a triangle T01 having three points as its vertices with the center of gravity G11 of the center of gravity G1 is the center of gravity G0 of pending execution, the center of gravity G1 of one waiting pending, and the center of gravity G1 of pending waiting adjacent to the one pending holding. And 3
It is larger than the area of triangles T12, T23, T34, T45, T56, T67, T78 having the points as the vertices.
Further, in the case where the center of gravity G0 of the pending execution is not arranged on the straight line L, the center of gravity interval between the pending pending and the pending pending (standby pending 1) adjacent to the pending pending is the distance d1( That is, when it is set to the center-of-gravity interval between the adjacent pending holds, the running center of gravity G0 and the intersection point P (specifically, the straight line L and the running pending center of gravity G0 to the straight line L). Area of a triangle T01 having three points, which are the intersection of the vertical line with the vertical line and the center of gravity G11 of the pending hold 1, and the center of gravity G0 of the pending hold and the center of gravity G1 of the pending hold, Triangles T12, T23, T34, T45 having three vertices with the center of gravity G1 of the waiting pending adjacent to one waiting pending
, T56, T67, T78.

In this way, a triangle having three points, namely, the center of gravity G0 of the pending hold, the center of gravity G1 of the pending pending, and the center of gravity G1 of the pending pending adjacent to the one pending pending, and the running By considering the triangle having three points of the center of gravity G0 of the hold, the intersection point P, and the center of gravity G11 of the hold 1 in the waiting state as vertices, for example, a decorative special pattern (identification information) is provided at a position that does not overlap the area of these triangles.
Can be stopped and displayed, a specific image (cut-in image, character image, etc.) can be displayed at a position that does not overlap these triangular regions, and the like. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that ensures the visibility of both the decorative special figure starting memory display and the other effect display.
Alternatively, for example, it is possible to display a specific image (a character image or the like that acts on the display of the decorative special figure starting memory) at a position overlapping with these triangular regions. As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize these triangular areas and perform effective presentation display.

Even when the running center of gravity G0 is not arranged on the straight line L, as in the case where the running center of gravity G0 is arranged on the straight line L, the shift start timing of each waiting holding shift in the holding shift effect, Whether to shift while keeping the moving speed constant, whether the moving speed is high or low,
It can be appropriately selected.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 63, the display area of the pending reservation is larger than the display area of the pending reservation, but the display area is not limited to this. That is, in the case where the center of gravity G0 of the pending hold is not arranged on the straight line L, the display area of the pending pending may be the same as the display area of the pending pending, or more than the display area of the pending pending. May be larger, or may be smaller than the display area of the standby hold.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 63, the centroid interval between the pending execution and the pending pending (standby pending 1) adjacent to the pending pending is the distance d1 (that is, the centroid interval between adjacent pending pending).
The distance d0 is set to be longer than the above, but the distance is not limited to this. Ie. When the center of gravity G0 of the pending execution is not arranged on the straight line L, the center of gravity interval between the pending pending and the pending pending (standby pending 1) adjacent to the pending pending is set to the distance d1. Alternatively, the distance may be set to a distance different from the distance d1.

In addition, each waiting hold (waiting hold 1 to 8) is, for example, in FIG.
), a shift along the shortest path (that is, a linear movement) may be performed, or, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(b), a shift along a path different from the shortest path (eg, a bounce movement). ) May be. Whether shifting along the shortest route or along a route different from the shortest route, the shift start timing and the moving speed (instantaneous moving speed) are the same as shown in, for example, FIGS. 54 to 58. As a result, the waiting-on-holding (waiting-on-hold 2 to 8) moving in the waiting-on-hold display portion 41b can be shifted in a state in which the center-of-gravity interval between adjacent waiting-on-holds is maintained at the distance d1.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the straight line L on which the center of gravity G1 of each waiting suspension is arranged is along the horizontal direction, but the straight line L may not be horizontal and may be inclined, for example.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the waiting state corresponding to the first starting memory which is the execution right of the first special figure variation display game and the second starting memory which is the execution right of the second special figure variation display game are supported. Although it is displayed on the standby hold display portion 41b without dividing it from the standby hold, it is not limited to this. That is, the pending hold corresponding to the first starting memory which is the execution right of the first special figure variation display game and the waiting pending corresponding to the second starting memory which is the execution right of the second special figure variation display game. It is also possible to display them separately on the standby hold display section 41b. In this case, for example, the waiting pending group corresponding to the first starting memory and the waiting pending group corresponding to the second starting memory may be displayed separately.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 65, the standby hold display section 41b includes a first standby hold display section 41b1 which is a standby hold display section for the first start storage and a standby hold display for the second start storage. If it is divided into a second standby hold display unit 41b2, which is a unit, a first standby hold display unit 41b1
The waiting hold closest to the second waiting hold display unit 41b2 among the waiting holds displayed in No. 4 and the waiting hold held on the second waiting hold display unit 41b2 closest to the first waiting hold display unit 41b1. The center-of-gravity interval with the waiting hold may be set to a distance d2 that is longer than the distance d1.
With this configuration, it is possible to easily discriminate between the pending hold corresponding to the first starting memory and the waiting pending corresponding to the second starting memory based on the difference in the center-of-gravity interval.
It should be noted that the standby hold display unit 41b includes the first standby hold display unit 41b1 and the second standby hold display unit 41.
In the case of being divided into b2 and FIG. 65, the execution pending display section 41c is located at the left end in FIG. 65, but it is not limited to this. For example, the execution pending display section 41c is the first standby pending display section 4c.
It may be located between 1b1 and the second standby display section 41b2.

The on-going hold display unit 41c includes a first wait hold display unit 41b1 and a second wait hold display unit 41b.
When located between 2 and 2, the center-of-gravity interval between the pending execution and the pending pending adjacent to the pending pending among the pending pending displayed on the first standby pending display portion 41b1 is a predetermined interval (first The center-of-gravity interval between the adjacent pending holds displayed on the 1-standby pending display part 41b1. Of the waiting pending displayed in 41b2, the important interval between the pending pending adjacent to the pending pending is a predetermined interval (the center of gravity between the pending pending adjacent to each other displayed in the second waiting pending display portion 41b2). Interval, for example, a second interval (for example, distance d0) different from the distance d1 may be set. Further, the first interval and the second interval may be the same or different.

The standby hold display unit 41b is divided into a first standby hold display unit 41b1 which is a standby hold display unit for the first startup storage and a second standby hold display unit 41b2 which is a standby hold display unit for the second startup storage. If not, when the next special figure variation display game starts, the waiting hold displayed on the waiting hold display unit 41b is shifted to the running hold display unit 41c by one. For example, in FIG.
In the example shown in FIG. 3, the on-hold hold displayed on the hold-hold display section 41b is shifted to the left by one.
On the other hand, the standby hold display unit 41b has the first standby hold display unit 41b1 and the second standby hold display unit 41.
When the next special map variation display game is started when the next special figure variation display game is the first special figure variation display game, the first standby hold display section 41b1 In the case where the pending hold displayed in is shifted to the running pending display section 41c by one and the next special figure variation display game is the second special figure variation display game, the second standby pending indication is displayed. Part 41b2
The on-hold hold displayed in 1 shifts to the on-hold hold display section 41c by one. Specifically, for example, when the in-execution pending display portion 41c is located at the left end as shown in FIG. 65, when the next special figure variation display game is the first special figure variation display game, If the pending hold displayed in the 1 standby hold display portion 41b1 is shifted to the left by one and the next special figure variation display game is the second special figure variation display game, the second standby hold indication is displayed. The pending hold displayed in the section 41b2 is shifted to the left by one. In addition, for example, when the execution pending display section 41c is located between the first standby pending display section 41b1 and the second standby pending display section 41b2, the next special figure variation display game is the first special figure variation display game. In this case, the first standby hold display section 41
In the case where the pending hold displayed in b1 is shifted to the center side by one and the next special figure variation display game is the second special figure variation display game, it is displayed in the second standby pending display section 41b2. The pending hold that is being performed shifts to the center side by one.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and when the result of the game is the special result, the game value is given to the player. A game machine that generates a special game state in which a start memory that is a right to execute a game based on the satisfaction of a start condition can be stored up to a predetermined number as a start memory means (game control device 1
00) and start memory display control means (production control device 300) for performing display control of a start memory display (standby hold) corresponding to the start memory, and corresponding to the game in relation to the start of the game. The start memory display (standby hold 1) moves from the first display area (standby hold display section 41b) to the second display area (running hold display section 41c), and the second display area is displayed during execution of the game. The center of gravity interval between the starting memory displays that are displayed as the changing memory display (holding during execution) in the display area and are adjacent to each other is set to a predetermined interval (distance d1), and the changing memory display and the changing memory display are adjacent to each other. The center-of-gravity interval with the starting memory display (waiting hold 1) is set to an interval (distance d0) different from the predetermined interval (see FIGS. 52, 61, 63, and 65).

Therefore, since the start memory display (holding during standby) is arranged at equal intervals, the start memory display suitably arranged in the limited display area can be displayed.
Also, since the changing memory display (holding during execution) is arranged apart from the starting memory display (holding during standby) group, the center of gravity interval between the changing memory display and the starting memory display, and the center of gravity interval between the starting memory displays. It is possible to easily discriminate between the changing memory display and the starting memory display based on the difference between and.
The interval (distance d0) different from the predetermined interval (distance d1) may be wider than the predetermined interval or narrower than the predetermined interval.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in association with the start of the game (special figure variation display game), the start memory display (standby hold 2 to 8) which does not correspond to the game has a predetermined center of gravity interval. It can be configured to move within the first display area (standby hold display section 41b) while maintaining the distance (d1) (see FIGS. 54 to 58).
With this configuration, in the hold shift effect, the starting memory display (holding 2 to 8 during standby) can be shifted while maintaining the state of being suitably arranged.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the center-of-gravity interval between the changing memory display (holding during execution) and the starting memory display (waiting hold 1) adjacent to the changing memory display is wider than a predetermined interval. (Distance d0) is set, and a start memory display (
As for the movement start timing (shift start timing) when the standby hold 1) moves to the second display area (running hold display portion 41c), a start memory display (standby hold 2 to 8) not corresponding to the game is displayed. The movement start timing is the same as the movement start timing when moving in the first display area (standby hold display portion 41b), and the moving speed when the start memory display corresponding to the game moves to the second display area corresponds to the game. The start memory display can be configured to be faster than the moving speed when moving in the first display area (see FIGS. 54 and 55).
With such a configuration, for example, the start memory displays (standby hold 1 to 8) start to move together, and only the start memory display (standby hold 1) corresponding to the game is shifted at high speed, In addition, it is possible to perform a novel hold shift effect such that the separation distance between the start memory display corresponding to the game (standby hold 1) and the start memory display adjacent to the start memory display (standby hold 2) is increased. it can.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the movement when the start memory display (standby hold 1) corresponding to the game (special figure variation display game) moves to the second display area (running hold display portion 41c) The start timing (shift start timing) seems to be earlier than the movement start timing when the start memory display (standby hold 2 to 8) that does not correspond to the game moves in the first display area (standby hold display portion 41b). It can be configured (see FIGS. 57 and 59).
With this configuration, the starting memory display (waiting hold 1) corresponding to the game moves first, so that attention can be paid to the starting memory display corresponding to the game.
Further, it is possible to perform a novel holding shift effect such that the starting memory display (standby hold 2 to 8) not corresponding to the game shifts following the starting memory display (waiting hold 1) corresponding to the game. it can.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the movement when the start memory display (standby hold 1) corresponding to the game (special figure variation display game) moves to the second display area (running hold display portion 41c) The end timing (shift end timing) seems to be later than the movement end timing when the start memory display (standby hold 2 to 8) that does not correspond to the game moves in the first display area (standby hold display portion 41b). It can be configured (see FIGS. 56, 58 and 60).
With this configuration, since the start memory display (waiting hold 1) corresponding to the game is moving to the end, attention can be paid to the start memory display corresponding to the game.

Furthermore, the movement end timing (shift end timing) when the start memory display (standby hold 1) corresponding to the game (special figure variation display game) moves to the second display area (running hold display portion 41c) is: The start memory display (standby hold 2 to 8) not corresponding to the game is later than the movement end timing when moving in the first display area (standby hold display portion 41b), and
The movement start timing (shift start timing) when the start memory display (standby hold 1) corresponding to the game (special figure variation display game) moves to the second display area (running hold display portion 41c) is the game. It is also possible to configure so that the start memory display (standby hold 2 to 8) not corresponding to is later than the movement start timing when moving in the first display area (standby hold display portion 41b) (FIGS. 58 and 60). reference).
With such a configuration, a start memory display (standby hold 2-8
) Shift, the start memory display (standby hold 1) corresponding to the game is displayed in the first display area (
It is possible to perform a novel hold shift effect such as being pushed out from the standby hold display section 41b).

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, a game value is given to the player. A game machine that generates a special game state in which a start memory that is a right to execute a game based on the satisfaction of a start condition can store up to a predetermined number of start memory means (game control device 100).
And a start memory display control means (production control device 300) for performing display control of a start memory display (standby hold) corresponding to the start memory, and the center of gravity interval between adjacent start memory displays is a predetermined interval. It is set to (distance d1) (see FIGS. 52, 61 to 63, and 65).
Therefore, since the starting memory display (holding during standby) is arranged at equal intervals, the suitably arranged starting memory display can be displayed.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in association with the start of the game (special figure variation display game), the start memory display (standby hold 1) corresponding to the game is displayed in the first display area (standby hold). While moving from the display unit 41b) to the second display region (running pending display unit 41c), the game is displayed as a changing memory display (running pending) in the second display region while the game is running, and the game is also running. The start memory display (standby hold 2 to 8) that does not correspond to the above is moved in the first display area, and the display mode of the changing memory display (in the present embodiment, the display area) is the display mode of the start memory display. Can be configured differently (see FIGS. 61 to 63 and FIG. 65).
With this configuration, it is possible to easily discriminate between the changing memory display and the starting memory display depending on the display mode.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display mode is a display area, and the display area of the changing memory display (holding during execution) is larger than the display area of the start memory display (holding during standby).
The center-of-gravity interval between the changing memory display and the starting memory display (waiting hold 1) adjacent to the changing memory display is set to a predetermined interval (distance d1), and the starting memory display (waiting hold 1) corresponding to the game is set. ) Moves to the second display area (running hold display section 41c) at the start timing (shift start timing), the start memory display (waiting hold 2 to 8) not corresponding to the game is the first display area. It can be configured to be the same as the movement start timing when moving in the (standby hold display portion 41b) (see FIGS. 62 and 54 to 56).
With such a configuration, for example, each start memory display (standby hold 1 to 8) starts to move together, and only the start memory display (standby hold 1) corresponding to the game expands, and during the shift, It is possible to perform a novel hold shift effect such that the separation distance between the start memory display (standby hold 1) corresponding to the game and the start memory display (standby hold 2) adjacent to the start memory display is shortened.
The display mode is not limited to the display area (size), and may be the shape, the color, or the like.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, a game value is given to the player. A game machine that generates a special game state in which a start memory that is a right to execute a game based on the satisfaction of a start condition can store up to a predetermined number of start memory means (game control device 100).
And start memory display control means (production control device 300) for performing display control of a start memory display (standby hold) corresponding to the start memory, the start memory display control means relating to the start of the game. , The display position of the start memory display is moved so that the start memory display (standby hold 2
8 to 8) can be configured such that the center-of-gravity intervals between them are set to unequal intervals during the movement of the display position of the start memory display (that is, during execution of the hold shift effect) (see FIGS. 59 and 60).

Therefore, since the start memory display is arranged at equal intervals during a period other than the time when the display position of the start memory display (holding during standby) is not moving, that is, when the hold shift effect is not executed, the start memory display is preferably arranged. Can be displayed.
Further, the starting memory display (holding 2 to 8 during standby) shifts (moves) without maintaining the state of being arranged at equal intervals. Therefore, a holding shift effect in which the starting memory display (holding hold 3 to 8) is shifted so as to follow the immediately preceding starting memory display (holding hold 2 to 7) or the starting memory display (
Innovative, such as a hold shift effect in which the waiting hold 2 to 7) is shifted so as to be pushed out from the fixed position (specifically, the fixed position before the shift) by the immediately following start memory display (holding hold 3 to 8). It is possible to perform various pending shift effects.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, a game value is given to the player. A game machine that generates a special game state in which a start memory that is a right to execute a game based on the satisfaction of a start condition can store up to a predetermined number of start memory means (game control device 100).
And a start memory display control means (production control device 300) for performing display control of a start memory display (standby hold) corresponding to the start memory, and a start corresponding to the game in relation to the start of the game. The memory display (standby hold 1) moves from the first display area (standby hold display section 41b) to the second display area (running hold display section 41c), and the second display area is displayed during execution of the game. Is displayed as a changing memory display (holding during execution), and a triangle having three vertices of the respective centers of gravity G1 and G1 of the pair of starting memory displays and the center of gravity G0 of the changing memory display adjacent to each other (for example, a triangle T12 ), and another pair of adjacent centroids G1 and G1 of the starting memory display and the centroid G0 of the moving memory display are vertexes (for example, triangles T23 and T34,).
(T45, T56, T67, T78) can have the same area (see FIG. 63).
Therefore, since the starting memory display (holding during standby) is arranged at equal intervals, the suitably arranged starting memory display can be displayed.
The “triangle” referred to here, that is, the triangles T12 to T78 is a virtual triangle formed by virtual lines and is not displayed on the display device 41.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, a game value is given to the player. A game machine that generates a special game state in which a start memory that is a right to execute a game based on the satisfaction of a start condition can store up to a predetermined number of start memory means (game control device 100).
And a start memory display control means (effect control device 300) for performing display control of a start memory display (standby hold) corresponding to the start memory, and a start corresponding to the game in relation to the start of the game. The memory display (standby hold 1) moves from the first display area (standby hold display section 41b) to the second display area (running hold display section 41c), and the second display area is displayed during execution of the game. In FIG. 3, the center of gravity G1 of the starting memory display is displayed as a changing memory display (holding during execution), and the center of gravity G1 of the starting memory display is arranged on a predetermined straight line (straight line L) and is adjacent to each other.
And a triangle (for example, triangle T12) having three vertices of the center of gravity G0 of the changing memory display as vertices,
The other pair of center of gravity G1 and G1 of the starting memory display and the center of gravity G0 of the changing memory display which are adjacent to each other.
And a triangle having three points as vertices (for example, triangles T23, T34, T45, T56, T67
, T78) have the same area, an intersection P between a perpendicular line drawn from the center of gravity G0 of the changing memory display to a predetermined straight line and the predetermined straight line, and a start memory display (standby hold 1 ), and the center of gravity G1 of ), and the center of gravity G0 of the memory display during change, having a vertex of three points T01.
And a pair of adjacent center of gravity G1 and G1 of the starting memory display and a center of gravity G0 of the changing memory display.
Triangles T12, T23, T34, T45, T56, T67, T78 having three points as vertices
And can be configured to have different areas (see FIG. 63).

Therefore, since the starting memory display (holding during standby) is arranged at equal intervals, the suitably arranged starting memory display can be displayed.
Also, since the changing memory display (holding during execution) is arranged apart from the starting memory display (holding during standby) group, the center of gravity interval between the changing memory display and the starting memory display, and the center of gravity interval between the starting memory displays. It is possible to easily discriminate between the changing memory display and the starting memory display based on the difference between and.
The intersection point P of the perpendicular line drawn from the center of gravity G0 of the changing memory display to the predetermined straight line (straight line L) and the center of gravity G of the starting memory display (standby hold 1) adjacent to the changing memory display.
1 and the center of gravity G0 of the changing memory display, the area of a triangle T01 having three points as vertices is the center of gravity G1 and G1 of a pair of adjacent starting memory displays and the center of gravity G0 of the changing memory display that are adjacent to each other. Three
It may be larger or smaller than the area of the triangles T12, T23, T34, T45, T56, T67, T78 having the points as the vertices.
The “triangle” referred to here, that is, the triangles T01 to T78 is a virtual triangle formed by virtual lines and is not displayed on the display device 41.

<Hold expansion effect>
Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment can execute the hold expansion effect. This hold expansion effect is an effect executed in a specific mode in which a transition is possible in a specific game state (for example, a time saving state), and the standby hold display section 41b is expanded to the entire display area of the display device 41, and It is an effect that displays a waiting hold that is larger than the waiting hold that is displayed during a period other than when the holding expansion effect is executed.
FIG. 66(a) shows an example of the display of the display device 41 during execution of the hold enlargement effect.
At the time of executing the hold expansion effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66A, the standby hold display section 41b is provided in the entire display area of the display device 41, and the corner portion of the display area of the display device 41 (in the case of the present embodiment). , Upper part) is provided with a pending display section 41c, a variable display section for small symbols 41d and a numerical display section 41e. That is, the execution pending display portion 41c, the small symbol variation display portion 41d
The numeral holding display section 41e is provided on the front side of the waiting holding display section 41b so as to overlap the waiting holding display section 41b.

The vertically long rectangular waiting holds are displayed side by side on the waiting hold display portion 41b, and the center-of-gravity interval (distance between the centers of gravity) between adjacent waiting holds is set to the distance d1.
In the present embodiment, the special figure variation display game is executed in the order of winning in the start winning area. Therefore, a maximum of eight standbys are displayed on the standby hold display section 41b during a period other than when the hold expansion effect is executed. It is possible (see FIG. 52). On the other hand, when executing the hold expansion effect, for example, FIG.
As shown in a), the standby hold display unit 41b is configured to display a maximum of four hold pending lines. That is, even when the number of undigested starting memories is 5 or more, the waiting hold 1 to 4
It is configured to display only.
The respective shapes of the waiting pending 1 to 4 are the same as the shapes of the areas obtained by vertically dividing the display area of the display device 41 into four equal parts, and the display areas (sizes) of the waiting pending 1 to 4 are respectively displayed. Device 4
It is the same as the area of a region obtained by vertically dividing one display region into four equal parts. Therefore, the pending hold 1 to 4
When all are displayed, the background image and the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the decorative special figure variable display game display section 41a are hidden in the standbys 1 to 4 on standby and are not visible. Further, in the present embodiment, the pending hold is displayed on the front side of the waiting pending 1 so as to be superimposed on the waiting pending 1.

For example, as shown in FIG. 66(b), a display mode of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory and a look-ahead result such as a variation pattern are displayed in the display mode of the on-hold suspension displayed when the suspension enlargement effect is executed. There are a normal display mode that is not suggested (default display mode) and a suggestion mode that suggests a look-ahead result such as a result or variation pattern of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory. Furthermore, in the suggestive aspect, the suggestive aspect A having the lowest expectation (the expectation of being a big hit, the likelihood of reach occurrence, etc.), the suggestive aspect B having a higher expectation than the suggestive aspect A, and the suggestive aspect B There is a suggestion mode C with high expectation.
For example, as shown in FIG. 66( b ), a facial expression image showing no expression (for example, a smile level of 0%) is displayed in the standby pending state of the normal display mode, and the standby mode pending state of the suggestion mode B is displayed. , A facial expression image showing a smile (for example, a smile degree of 30%) is displayed, and a smile (
For example, a facial expression image showing a smile degree of 100%) is displayed. On the other hand, no image is displayed in the waiting pending state of the suggestion mode A.

As described above, the display mode of the pending hold corresponding to the start memory that is won in the lottery of the standby hold change effect is changed to the suggestion mode at a predetermined timing (or displayed in the state in which the suggestion mode is changed from the beginning). Be done). Which of the suggestion modes A to C is to be changed is determined in a lottery or the like of the standby hold change effect, but, for example, when the result of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the pending hold of the change target is a failure. The suggestive aspect A is most easily selected from the suggestive aspects A to C, and the suggestive aspect C is most easily selected from the suggestive aspects A to C when the jackpot is a big hit.

Furthermore, when the hold expansion effect is executed, predetermined information (in the case of the present embodiment, the degree of expectation) can be suggested by the display area of the hold pending state. Specifically, for example, the standby hold display area displayed when the hold enlargement effect is executed is equal to the area of the display area of the display device 41 divided vertically into four areas (default display area). Area), a large display area larger than the middle display area, and a small display area smaller than the middle display area.
For example, when the display area lottery is performed after winning the lottery for the standby hold change effect, and when the display area lottery is won, when the display mode of the standby hold changes to the suggestion mode, the display of the standby hold is displayed. The area changes to a large display area or a small display area. Alternatively, the waiting hold may be displayed in a state in which the display mode is changed from the beginning to the suggestion mode. In that case, when the display area lottery is won, the waiting hold concerned has a large display area from the beginning. Alternatively, the display area is changed to a small display area.
Whether to change to the large display area or the small display area is determined in the display area lottery or the like. For example, when the result of the special figure variable display game corresponding to the pending hold of the change target is out of alignment. The small display area is more easily selected than the large display area, and the large display area is more easily selected than the small display area in the case of a big hit. That is, the large display area has higher expectations than the small display area. The large display area may have a lower expectation than the small display area.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 67(a), the display area of the waiting hold 3 is a large display area, and the display areas of the other waiting holds (that is, the holding holds 1, 2, 4) are middle display areas. .. The on-hold hold 3 is displayed on the front side of the on-hold hold 2 and the on-hold hold 4 in an overlapping manner with the on-hold hold 2 and the on-hold hold 4. For example, as shown in FIG. 67(a), even if one of the plurality of waiting pending areas has a large display area, all the display areas of the plurality of waiting pending areas are medium display areas. Similar to (see FIG. 66(a)), the center-of-gravity interval (distance between center of gravity) between adjacent waiting-standbys is set to the distance d1.
Further, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 67(b), the display area of the waiting hold 2 is a small display area, and the display areas of the other waiting holds (that is, the waiting hold 1, 3, 4) are medium display areas. Is. For example, as shown in FIG. 67(b), even if one of the plurality of waiting pending areas has a small display area, all of the plurality of waiting pending areas have a medium display area. Similar to (FIG. 66( a )), the distance between the centers of gravity (distance between the centers of gravity) between the adjacent waiting holds is the distance d.
It is set to 1.
Note that, in FIGS. 66 and 67, the "centroid (center)" of the waiting state is indicated by dots for convenience, but such "centroid" is not actually displayed. Further, in FIG. 66 and FIG. 67, the “auxiliary line” and the like are shown by broken lines for convenience, but such “auxiliary line” and the like are not actually displayed.

As described above, the display mode of the waiting-on-hold display that is displayed during execution of the hold expansion effect is a normal display mode (display area is only a medium display area), a large display area suggestion mode A to C, and a middle display. There are area suggestion modes A to C and small display area suggestion modes A to C.
Notification is made according to the types of facial expression images in the pending hold that are displayed in a suggestive manner (in the present embodiment, three types: "no facial expression image", "facial expression image showing a smile", "facial expression image showing a smile"). It is a rough expectation. In addition to the type of the facial expression image, the display area of the standby hold can be changed, so that a more detailed expectation can be notified.

Here, in the present embodiment, the concept of scenario data (scenario layer) is used in the drawing control of the display screen displayed on the display device 41. The scenario is divided into a plurality of display layers (scenario layers) for display effects such as a design change effect, such as a background scenario, a left symbol scenario, a right symbol scenario,... This is a method of creating a picture on one screen by setting, controlling them individually as a scenario, and combining all the scenarios.
Multiple display layers (scenario layers) are individually categorized for each display element such as background, left pattern, right pattern,... It is set as a table of operation scenarios for switching and displaying effects.

In the present embodiment, the display elements (display constituent elements) used in the rendering of the display device 41 are
8 of "background", "left design", "right design", "middle design", "notice 1 character", "notice 2 character", "hold display (decorative special drawing start memory display)" and "small design" It is divided into two elements.
Then, a scenario table for display effects such as fluctuation effects is created for each of the plurality of display elements. In the present embodiment, the scenario table, "scenario table of background control", "scenario table of left symbol control", "scenario table of right symbol control", "scenario table of middle symbol control", "notice 1 character control" It is created by being divided into eight elements of a "scenario table", a "preliminary 2 character control scenario table", a "holding display control scenario table", and a "small symbol control scenario table".
Each display element is configured by a display layer, and these display layers are sequentially overlapped from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the screen to create one display screen. In the case of the present embodiment, the display layer includes “background layer”, “left symbol layer”, “right symbol layer”, “middle symbol layer”, “notice A layer” to “notice F layer”, “holding layer”. And there are 12 types of "small design layer".

The effect control device 300, the effect display edit process of the main process (FIG. 28) (step C13).
In V, the predetermined images are displayed in the order of the number of motion management areas in the order of motion management areas.
A process of drawing in the virtual drawing space of the RAM 326 (that is, a process of pasting a sprite of a predetermined image in the virtual drawing space) is performed.
As shown in FIG. 68, the virtual drawing space is divided into 12 drawing areas including a drawing area for motion management area 0 to a drawing area for motion management area 11. The drawing areas are arranged in the order of the numbers of the corresponding motion management areas, and the display layer in which the predetermined image is drawn is stored in each drawing area.

Specifically, in the effect display editing process, the effect control device 300 first, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 0 is not NULL, sets the “background layer” on which the predetermined image is drawn in the virtual drawing space. It is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 0.
Next, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 1 is not NULL, the "notice A layer" on which the predetermined image is drawn is stored in the motion management area 1 drawing area of the virtual drawing space.
Next, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 2 is not NULL, the "notice B layer" on which the predetermined image is drawn is stored in the motion management area 2 drawing area of the virtual drawing space.

Similarly, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 3 is not NULL, the “left pattern layer” is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 3 in the virtual drawing space, and then,
If the data in the address area of the motion management area 4 is not NULL, the "right pattern layer"
Is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 4 in the virtual drawing space, and then when the data in the address area of the motion management area 5 is not NULL, the "middle pattern layer" is set as the drawing area for the motion management area 5 in the virtual drawing space. Then, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 6 is not NULL, the “notice C layer” is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 6 in the virtual drawing space, and then, in the address area of the motion management area 7. Data is NU
If it is not LL, the "notice D layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 7 in the virtual drawing space. Then, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 8 is not NULL, the "reserve layer" is set in the virtual drawing space. If the data in the address area of the motion management area 9 is not NULL, the “notice E layer” is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 9 in the virtual drawing space, and then, When the data in the address area of the motion management area 10 is not NULL, the “notice F layer” is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 10 in the virtual drawing space, and then the data in the address area of the motion management area 11 is not NULL. Then, the "small pattern layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 11 in the virtual drawing space, and the effect display editing process is ended.

Here, when the data in the address area of the motion management area X is NULL, the display layer is not stored in the corresponding drawing area, so the drawing area remains blank. Specifically, for example, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 10 is NULL, the display layer (in the case of the present embodiment, “previous notice F” in the drawing area for the motion management area 10 in the virtual drawing space of the VRAM 326). Layer”) is not stored, so motion management area 1
The drawing area for 0 remains blank. It is also possible to sequentially store the display layers so that the non-blank drawing areas are continuous (that is, the display layers are stored while being packed forward), but in that case, one display screen is configured. The drawing areas for storing the display layers other than the background layer change depending on the number of display layers to be stored. Therefore, each time these display layers are stored in the virtual drawing space, the drawing area for storing the display layer (that is, a blank area). It is necessary to search the drawing area on the frontmost (leading) side of the drawing areas, and the processing becomes complicated accordingly. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by configuring each display layer to be stored in a predetermined drawing area regardless of the effect contents (that is, the number of display layers that configure one display screen), Each time the display layer is stored in the virtual drawing space, it is not necessary to search the drawing area for storing the display layer one by one, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The display layers stored in the respective drawing areas are sequentially overlapped in the order of arrangement of the drawing areas from the screen back side (lower layer side) to the screen front side (upper layer side) to create one display screen. Specifically, in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 68, the "background layer" stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 1 located at the head of the 12 drawing areas is the most screen. The "small design layer" stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 11 located at the end of the 12 drawing areas on the back side (bottom layer) is closest to the screen front side (top layer). Will be placed.

In such an effect control, when an effect screen (display screen) is generated, it is divided into a plurality of display layers (scenario layers) corresponding to the display elements of the effect screen and set in advance as a table, and then these are individually set. Are controlled as scenarios and all the scenarios are combined in the form of a display layer to generate a picture of one screen and display it on the display device 41.
In the effect display editing process, the effect control device 300, for example, in the “holding layer”, holds on standby (decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the standby hold display unit 41b) and on hold (on-hold display). And the decorative special figure starting memory display) displayed on the portion 41c. Further, in the "small symbol layer", a small symbol (identification symbol displayed in the small symbol variable display section 41d) and a number indicating the number of undigested starting memories (a number displayed in the number hold display section 41e). And to draw.

For example, as shown in FIG. 69, the “holding layer” is a “background layer”, a “left design layer”,
It is arranged on the screen front side with respect to the “right pattern layer” and the “middle pattern layer”.
Therefore, when the number of unsatisfied starting memories is four or more during execution of the hold expansion effect, as shown in, for example, FIG. 66(a) or 70(a), the background image (that is, “background layer”) is displayed. ”), and the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 41a (that is, “left symbol layer”, “right symbol layer” and “middle symbol layer”) The drawn predetermined image) is wholly invisible because it is entirely hidden by the standby-on-hold 1 to 4 and the execution-on-hold (that is, the predetermined image drawn on the “holding layer”). However, even if the number of unsatisfied starting memories is four or more, if any of the standby holdings 1 to 4 has a small display area, for example, as shown in FIG. 67(b). The background image and a part of the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the decorative special figure variable display game display section 41a are visible. Note that, in FIG. 69, the notice layers A to F are not shown for convenience.

Further, when the number of unsatisfied starting memories is three, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(b), the background image and the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the decorative special figure variable display game display section 41a are displayed. Of these, the standby hold 1 to 3 and the portion overlapping the running hold are invisible, but the other portions are visible.
When the number of unsatisfied starting memories is two, among the background image and the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the decoration special figure variation display game display section 41a, the standby hold 1, 2 and execution are executed. The portion overlapping with the middle storage is invisible, but the other portions are visible.

When the number of unsatisfied starting memories is 1, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(c), the background image and the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the decorative special figure variable display game display section 41a are displayed. Of these, the part that overlaps with the pending hold 1 and the pending call is invisible, but the other parts are visible.
Further, when the number of unsatisfied starting memories is 0, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(d), the background image and the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the decorative special figure variable display game display section 41a are displayed. Of these, the portion overlapping the pending execution is invisible, but the other portions are visible.
It should be noted that the display mode of the standby hold may be changed to other than the normal display mode and the suggestion modes A to B during the shift. In other words, the display mode of the pending hold may include a display mode that appears only during the shift.

In addition, during execution of the hold enlargement effect, whether or not the decoration special view variation display game displayed in the decoration special view variation display game display section 41a is displayed on the back side from the standby hold (that is, the decoration special illustration). It may be configured to suggest predetermined information (for example, the degree of expectation or a big hit confirmation) depending on whether or not a portion of the variable display game that overlaps with the pending hold becomes invisible.
Specifically, for example, when there is a start memory with a high degree of expectation in the undigested start memory (for example, a start memory of a special figure variation display game in which an effect is executed in an effect mode with a high expectation for a big hit). For example, as shown in FIG. 70, when the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed on the back side from the standby hold, and there is no start memory with high expectation in the undigested start memory, As shown at 71, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed on the front side of the standby hold. In this case, even when the standby hold is displayed, the player can recognize that the expectation is low when the entire decoration special figure variation display game is visible.
Further, for example, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is a big hit (or when there is a start memory in which the result is a big hit among the undigested start memories), a predetermined probability, for example, As shown in FIG. 71, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed on the front side of the standby hold. In this case, even when the standby hold is displayed, the player can recognize that a big hit occurs when the entire decoration special figure variation display game is visible.

The said structure can be implement|achieved by changing the display layer which draws the hold pending, according to predetermined information (for example, expectation degree or big hit confirmation).
That is, by storing the “holding layer” in which the pending pending and the pending pending are drawn in the drawing area for the motion management area 8, the decorative special figure variable display game can be displayed on the back side of the pending pending. it can.

On the other hand, the "notice A layer" in which the pending hold is drawn is stored in the motion management area 1 drawing area (or the "notice B layer" in which the waiting hold is drawn is stored in the motion management area 2 drawing area). By storing the "holding layer" in which the pending hold is drawn in the drawing area for the motion management area 8, the decorative special figure variable display game can be displayed on the front side of the pending hold.
When the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed on the front side of the pending hold, the "notice A layer" in which the pending pending and the pending pending are drawn is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 1 (or The "notice B layer" in which execution pending and standby pending is drawn is stored in the motion management area 2 drawing area, and the display layer is not stored in the motion management area 8 drawing area (or nothing is drawn). A non-reserved layer is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 8). With such a configuration, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed on the front side of the pending execution and the standby pending.

It is also possible to perform a button advance notice effect as an effect in which the player's operation is intervened when the hold expansion effect is executed.
Specifically, when the effect control device 300 shifts to the specific mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 72A, the hold expansion effect is started. Next, when the execution timing of the standby hold change effect arrives, the button advance notice effect is started, and as shown in FIG. 72B, for example, as shown in FIG. Hold pending for memory.
Here, a promotion image that prompts the user to operate the effect button 25 is displayed in the standby hold 3). Then, when the effect button 25 is operated within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 72C, for example,
The display mode of the pending hold of the change target is changed. In the example shown in FIG. 72, the display mode of the on-hold hold 3 is changed from the normal display mode to the suggestion mode C (indication mode C of the medium display area) in accordance with the operation of the effect button 25.

The promotion image is, for example, a button image simulating the effect button 25, an instruction image for instructing the operation mode of the effect button 25 (for example, a character image such as “press!” or “continuous hit!”), and the remaining operation valid period. It is composed of a timer image indicating the length (for example, a time bar image) and a notice image indicating the degree of expectation and the like (in the present embodiment, an image simulating one or more stars). This promotion image is drawn on, for example, a notice layer (“notice E layer” or “notice F layer”) arranged on the screen front side of the “holding layer”.
In addition, even if the effect button 25 is operated within the operation valid period, the display mode of the standby hold may not be changed. In other words, when the effect button 25 is operated within the operation valid period, it is possible to provide a case where the display mode of the standby hold is changed and a case where it is not changed.

It is also possible to draw each image that constitutes the promotion image on different display layers.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73, for example, a "button image layer" in which a button image is drawn and a "timer image" are drawn as display layers arranged on the screen front side of the "holding layer". It is also possible to provide a "timer image layer", a "preliminary image layer" in which a preliminary image is drawn, and a "instruction image layer" in which a preliminary image is drawn.
In the present embodiment, the promotion image suggests the degree of expectation and the like depending on the number of stars in the notice image. That is, the button image, the timer image, and the instruction image are the same regardless of the degree of expectation, but the notice image differs depending on the degree of expectation. Further, the promotion image indicates the operation mode by the instruction image. That is, the button image, the timer image, and the preview image are the same regardless of the requested operation mode, but the instruction image is different depending on the requested operation mode. Therefore, by drawing the images forming the promotion image on different display layers, only the “preliminary image layer” among these layers differs depending on the degree of expectation, etc. Since only the “layer” is different, it is possible to save data capacity and improve development efficiency.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 73, the “notice image layer” is replaced with the “button image layer”.
By arranging it between the “instruction image layer” and the “button image layer” on the front side of the screen, it is possible to display the notice image on the front side of the button image so as to be superimposed on the button image. As a result, the notice image can be made conspicuous, and the notice image is not hidden by the button image to make it difficult to visually recognize, so that an effective notice effect can be provided.

Further, it is possible to change the display position of the promotion image according to the requested operation mode.
Specifically, when the button advance notice effect to be executed is a type of button advance notice effect that requires an operation that requires a relatively short time, such as a single-press effect, a promotion image is displayed in the center of the pending hold of the change target. Is displayed. Therefore, in this case, when the facial expression image is displayed in the pending state of the change target, for example, as shown in FIG. 72B, the promotion image is displayed at a position overlapping the facial expression image.
On the other hand, when the button advance notice effect to be executed is a type of button advance notice effect that requires an operation that takes a relatively long time, such as a continuous hit effect, a promotion image is displayed in the waiting pending corner of the change target. Therefore, in this case, when the facial expression image is displayed in the pending state of the change target, for example, as shown in FIG. 74, the promotion image is displayed at a position not overlapping the facial expression image.
Alternatively, the promotion image is displayed at a position overlapping with the facial expression image but less overlapping with the promotion image for a single-press effect or the like.

In this way, by changing the display position of the promotion image in accordance with the requested operation mode, not only the promotion image itself (for example, the instruction image in the promotion image) but also the display position of the promotion image is requested. Since the operation mode can be determined, the player can quickly recognize the requested operation mode.
Further, when the button notice effect to be executed is a type of button notice effect that requires an operation that takes a relatively long time, the display time of the promotion image (that is, the operation valid period) is relatively long, and therefore, the waiting pending state is set. By displaying the promotion image at a position that does not overlap with the facial expression image (or a position that overlaps the facial expression image but does not overlap with the facial expression image), it is possible to effectively protect the facial expression image from being damaged by the promotional image. Button notice production can be executed.

That is, when most of the facial expression image overlaps the promotion image, most of the facial expression image is hidden by the promotion image, and the facial expression image becomes difficult to visually recognize until the promotion image disappears.
In the button advance notice effect of the type that requires an operation that requires a relatively short time, the display time of the promotion image is relatively short and the time until the promotion image disappears is short, so even if most of the facial expression image overlaps the promotion image. , You will be able to check the facial expression image immediately. On the other hand, in the button notice effect of a type that requires an operation that takes a relatively long time, since the display time of the promotion image is relatively long and the time until the promotion image disappears is long, most of the facial expression image overlaps the promotion image. , It's difficult to confirm the facial expression image. Therefore, in the button notice effect of a type that requires an operation that takes a relatively long time, the promotion image is displayed at a position that does not overlap the facial expression image in the standby state (or a position that overlaps the facial expression image but has little overlap). This makes it possible to secure the visibility of the facial expression image (that is, to correctly confirm which of the plurality of facial expression images is displayed in the standby).

Further, when executing the hold expansion effect, it is also possible to perform a suggestion effect in which the pending hold of the change target is suggested by another waiting hold. This suggestive effect is an effect included in the pending change effect. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a switching effect that switches the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display to the suggestion mode (when the display mode changes) and the execution of the switching effect before starting the switching effect are suggested. The suggested effect (before the change of the display mode) is included in the pending change effect.
Specifically, for example, a new starting memory is generated, and the waiting pending corresponding to the starting memory is displayed from the beginning by a lottery of the waiting pending change effect targeting the starting memory or a display area lottery. It is assumed that it is determined that the area suggestion mode B is displayed and the medium display area suggestion mode C is displayed from a predetermined timing.

In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 75(a), the effect control device 300 first sets the waiting hold corresponding to the start storage, that is, the waiting hold of the change target (waiting hold 2 here) to the middle The display mode is displayed in the suggestion mode B. In addition, when the pending hold of the change target is displayed, the pending hold (here, the pending hold 1) displayed before the waiting pending of the change target is changed to
The suggestion effect is executed by acting on the pending hold of the change target.
In the example shown in FIG. 75, the facial expression images in the pending hold other than the changing target pending hold are
Pay attention to the pending hold of the change target (specifically, the look of the facial expression image in the pending hold other than the pending hold of the change target faces the pending hold of the change target) The pending hold other than the target pending hold is made to act on the changing target pending hold, but the manner of operation is not limited to this. For example, by performing an effect in which a suggestion image (for example, an image that resembles a sword) jumps from a pending hold other than the changing target waiting pending to a changing target waiting pending, other than the changing target waiting pending The on-hold hold of (1) may be applied to the on-hold hold of the change target.

Next, when a new start memory is generated, the effect control device 300 displays, for example, FIG.
As shown in (c), the suggestion effect is executed by displaying the pending hold that acts on the pending hold of the change target as the pending hold corresponding to the starting memory. Then, at a predetermined timing, as shown in, for example, FIG. 75(d), the display mode of the pending hold of the change target is changed to the suggestion mode C of the medium display area.
In addition, it is configured to display a promotion image that prompts the user to operate the effect button 25 after performing the suggestive effect, and to change the display mode of the pending hold when the effect button 25 is operated within the operation valid period. Is also possible.

In addition, even if the suggestive effect is executed, the display mode of the standby hold does not have to change. That is, it is possible to provide a case where the display mode of the standby hold is changed and a case where it is not changed after the suggestive effect is executed.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 75, the display mode of the pending hold of the change target is changed from the suggestion mode to another suggestion mode after the suggestion effect, but of course, after the suggestion effect, the normal display mode is performed. May be changed to a suggested mode.

In this way, by performing the suggestion effect in which the pending hold of the change target is suggested by another pending hold, the pending hold of the change target becomes clear.
For example, when there are a plurality of waiting holds, it is difficult to know which waiting hold is to be changed. In particular, when the display form of the pending hold of the change target and the display form of the pending hold that is not the change target are the same, it is difficult to understand which standby hold is the change target.
On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 75, the display mode of the waiting pending 2 (waiting pending for change) and the displaying pending 4 (standby pending not changing) are the same. However, since the pending hold 4 acts on the waiting hold 2, the player easily recognizes that the waiting hold 2 is a change target (that is, the waiting hold 2 should be noted). can do. Therefore, while the hold change effect is being executed, by performing the suggestion effect that suggests the waiting hold of the change target by another waiting hold, it is possible to execute the hold change effect in which the place (point) to be noticed is easy to understand. It will be possible.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the standby hold display unit 41b is displayed on the display device 4 when the hold expansion effect is executed.
Although it is set to the entire display area of No. 1, the size of the standby hold display unit 41b during execution of the hold enlargement effect is larger than the size of the standby hold display unit 41b during a period other than when executing the hold enlargement effect. It should be big too. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG.
A central portion (for example, a portion where the decorative special figure variation display game display portion 41a is provided) and a lower portion (for example, a standby hold display portion 41b and a running state during a period other than the execution time of the hold enlargement effect) of the display area of the display device 41. The standby hold display unit 41b may be set in a portion (where the hold display unit 41c is provided) to execute the hold enlargement effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the hold expansion effect is executed, the vertically long rectangular waiting holds are arranged side by side, but the shape and the arrangement of the waiting holds are not limited to this. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76(b), for example, horizontally long waiting standbys may be arranged vertically, or, for example, as shown in FIG. Standby holdings may be arranged vertically, or vertically long elliptical waiting holdings may be arranged horizontally, for example, FIG. 77(a).
As shown in FIG. 3, circular standbys may be arranged side by side (or vertically).
In addition, in the present embodiment, the waiting hold is arranged side by side, and the waiting hold is shifted to the left whenever the starting memory is exhausted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the starting memory is exhausted. It is also possible to arrange to shift the waiting hold to the right every time. Also, when the waiting hold is arranged vertically, it is possible to shift the waiting hold upward or to shift it downward every time the starting memory is exhausted. It is possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, the facial expression image is displayed in the standby state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 77(a), the facial expression image may be displayed outside the standby state. Further, in the present embodiment, at the time of executing the hold expansion effect, the type of display mode (any of the normal display mode and the suggestion modes A to C) is used depending on the facial expression image in standby (including “no facial expression image”). There is)
However, instead of (or in addition to) the facial expression image, a notification image other than the facial expression image such as a character image such as "Hot!" (
Alternatively, it can be displayed in the "standby" state.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 77(b), it is possible to execute a sub game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed within the waiting hold (or outside the waiting hold) when executing the hold expansion effect. is there. In the example shown in FIG. 77( b ), the sub game is being executed in the waiting pending 3.
This sub game may be a game corresponding to the special figure changing display game or may be a game not corresponding to the special figure changing display game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the hold expansion effect is executed, the execution-in-progress is arranged outside the row of the standby-in-progress, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 77(c), for example. , The execution pending (the decoration special figure starting memory display with grid hatching in the figure) does not deviate from the waiting pending column, the center of gravity G0 of the pending pending is on the straight line L (that is, each waiting pending It may be arranged on the same straight line as the center of gravity G1).
In addition, in the case of the present embodiment, at the time of executing the hold expansion effect, the standby hold display unit 41b is configured to display up to four standby holds, but the present invention is not limited to this and, for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 78(b), it is also possible to display a maximum of eight standbys in standby on the standby suspension display section 41b even when the suspension expansion effect is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special figure variation display game is executed in the order of winning in the starting winning area. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one special figure variation display game (eg, second special figure variation display). The game may be preferentially executed.
When the one special figure variation display game is configured to be preferentially executed, only the pending hold corresponding to the first starting memory which is the execution right of the first special figure variation display game when executing the hold enlargement effect. Can be displayed, and the second right which is the execution right of the second special figure variable display game can be displayed.
It is also possible to display only the pending hold corresponding to the starting memory, or the waiting pending corresponding to the first starting memory which is the execution right of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game. It is also possible to display both the pending hold corresponding to the second starting memory, which is the execution right of.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and when the result of the game is the special result, the game value is given to the player. A game machine that generates a special game state in which a predetermined random number is extracted based on the satisfaction of a start condition and is stored as a game start memory (game control device 100),
Starting memory display control means (production control device 300) that displays a starting memory display (holding during standby) corresponding to the starting memory on the display device 41, and a first variation that variably displays a plurality of identification symbols corresponding to the game. Display device (variable display executed on decorative special figure variable display game display section 41a) and second variable display effect (variable display executed on small symbol variable display section 41d) display device 4
1 is displayed on the center side of the display area of the display device 41 than the second variable display effect, in the normal mode. While in the display state, the display mode is set in the non-display state in the specific mode different from the normal mode, the second variable display effect is set in the display state in both the normal mode and the specific mode, and the start memory display is set in the specific mode (holding mode). In the enlargement effect execution), it is displayed larger than in the normal mode (a period other than when the hold enlargement effect is executed).

Therefore, in the specific mode, the start memory display (holding during standby) is displayed larger than in the normal mode, and the first variation display effect (decorative special figure variation display game) is not displayed. Therefore, since the start memory display can be made conspicuous, it is possible to display the start memory display that enhances the interest of the player.
In the present embodiment, the first variation display effect (decorative special figure variation display game) is displayed even during the specific mode (that is, when the hold enlargement effect is executed), and the first variation display effect is displayed as a start memory display ( It is configured to appear as if the first variable display effect is not displayed by overlapping the start memory display on the back side of (holding during standby), but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the specific mode, It is also possible to configure not to display the 1-variation display effect. That is, "invisible state"
May be displayed (the display layer in which the predetermined image is drawn in the corresponding drawing area is stored) but hidden from other images and invisible (or the display layer is not displayed in the corresponding drawing area). It may not be stored, or a display layer in which nothing is drawn in the corresponding drawing area is stored). In a state where it is displayed but hidden by another image and the number of undigested starting memories is less than 4, as shown in FIG. 70, for example, part or all of the first variable display effect is displayed. In the state where it is displayed (visible), but not displayed in the first place,
Even if the number of undigested starting memories is less than four, the first variable display effect is not displayed (not visible).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment uses a predetermined random number as a game corresponding to the predetermined random number (
A special determination variable display game) is provided with a pre-judgment means (game control device 100) that makes a pre-judgment before it is executed, and a start memory display (waiting) is displayed during a specific mode (when executing the hold enlargement effect). The display mode of (hold) includes a normal mode that does not suggest the result of the preliminary determination (normal display mode) and a suggestive mode that suggests the result of the preliminary determination (indication modes A to C). As the memory display, a predetermined image (in the present embodiment, a facial expression image representing no expression) is displayed in the starting memory display, and in the starting memory display of the suggestion mode, other than the predetermined image in the starting memory display. There is a start memory display of the first mode (indication mode B, C) in which the image of No. is displayed, and a start memory display of the second mode (indication mode A) in which no image is displayed in the start memory display. The starting memory display of the second mode can be configured so that the reliability (expectation level) of the game result based on the corresponding starting memory being a special result is lower than that of the starting memory display of the first mode.
With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an on-hold effect according to the reliability (expectation), and thus it is possible to display a start memory display that enhances the player's interest. further,
By not displaying an image in the starting memory display with low reliability (expectation) (holding during standby), the starting memory display with low reliability can be made inconspicuous, so that the starting memory display with high reliability is conspicuous. As a result, it is possible to display a starting memory display that enhances the interest of the player.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with operation means (effect button 25) for effect that can be operated by the player, and the start memory display control means (effect control device 300) is in a specific mode (hold expansion effect effect). (At the time of execution), the image in the starting memory display (in the present embodiment, a facial expression image (including no facial expression image)) can be changed when the operating means is operated at a predetermined timing. See FIG. 72).
With this configuration, when the operation means is operated, the image in the start memory display (holding in standby) can be changed, that is, the display mode of the start memory display can be changed, and thus the player's A starter memory display can be displayed that is entertaining.
In the present embodiment, for example, when the display mode of the waiting pending state changes from the normal display mode to any one of the suggestion modes A to C of the medium display area, or the suggestion modes A to C of the medium display area. When any one of them is changed to the other one, only the facial expression image in the waiting pending state is changed, and the outer frame of the waiting pending state is not changed. Therefore, in this case, even after the display mode of the pending hold is changed, the background image and the decorative special figure variation table game remain hidden due to the pending hold.
To change the image in the start memory display, switch the image to a different image (
For example, the display mode is the suggestion mode B or the suggestion mode C, and the image is deleted (for example,
The display mode becomes the suggestion mode A).

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable display effect control means (effect control device 300),
In a specific mode (during execution of the hold expansion effect), a third variable display effect (sub game) for variably displaying a plurality of identification symbols in the starting memory display (standby hold) is configured to be displayed on the display device 41. (FIG. 77(b)).
With such a configuration, the third variable display effect (in the standby memory display)
Since it is possible to play a sub game, it is possible to display a starting memory display that enhances the interest of the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, a game value is given to the player. A game machine that generates a special game state, in which a predetermined random number is extracted based on the satisfaction of a start condition, and is stored as a start memory of the game (game control device 100), and a start corresponding to the start memory. Starting memory display control means (production control device 300) for displaying a memory display (holding during standby) and pre-determination means for pre-determining a predetermined random number before the game corresponding to the predetermined random number is executed. (Effect control device 300), the center-of-gravity interval between the adjacent starting memory displays is set to a predetermined interval (distance d1), and the starting memory display control means determines the result of the preliminary determination (in the case of the present embodiment). , A starting memory display can be configured to be displayed in the display area selected based on the reliability (expectation) (see FIG. 67).
Therefore, the display area of the starting memory display can indicate the result of the preliminary determination (for example, the reliability (expectation level)), so that the starting memory display that enhances the interest of the player can be displayed.
Further, since the starting memory display (holding during standby) is arranged at equal intervals, the suitably arranged starting memory display can be displayed.

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and other gaming machines such as other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use the game balls. Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, but includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines that use game balls.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

10 Amusement machine 25 Production button (operation means)
41 display device 41b standby hold display section (first display area)
41c Execution pending display section (second display area)
100 game control device (starting storage means, advance determination means)
300 effect control device (starting memory display control means, variable display effect control means)
d1 distance (predetermined interval)
G0 Center of gravity of pending execution (center of gravity of memory display during change)
G1 Waiting center of gravity (Center of gravity of start memory display)
L straight line (predetermined straight line)
P Intersection points T01, T12, T23, T34, T45, T56, T67, T78 Triangle

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a start condition and generates a special game state in which a game value is given to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
A start storage means for extracting a predetermined random number based on the establishment of the start condition and storing it as start memory for the game;
Start memory display control means for displaying a start memory display corresponding to the start memory,
And a pre-judgment means for pre-judging the predetermined random number before the game corresponding to the predetermined random number is executed,
The center of gravity interval between the starting memory displays adjacent to each other is set to a predetermined interval,
The starting memory display control means is capable of displaying the starting memory display in a display area selected based on the result of the preliminary determination.

Images